Loading...
Plans (28) BUP2021 -00226 OFFICERECEIVED COhV 1 2 3 4 SEP 2 0 2021 GI I Y OF ARD BUILDING DIVISION O O O oossoe° O O O o AMERICAN FAMILY CARE ° ° ° CONSULTANTS: O O O 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. O O O TIGARD , OREGON 97223 O ° OFFICE C®P ° ° CITY OF TIGAP.M O ° MEWED FOR CODE COMPLIANCE C O O O O C Approved. I ° ° rc: omit ##• al I an A a 6 O O ddress:• 116�P��;�% c J-4" O VALIDITY OF PERMIT °1te #: THE ISSUANCE OF A PERMIT Y. Dates 1 O_j BASED ON CONSTRUCTION ° ° ° ° DOCUMENTS AND OTHER ° ° ° DATA SHALL NOT PREVENT SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY THE CODE OFFICIAL FROM ° ° O ° REQUIRING CORRECTION ERRORS. O O O Irv^ AR��r� O O O O LOUISE M. W SCHLATTER n ° 0 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL '� TARII1622 0 09-03-202100 F 'ciQaer (/fr 02/2021 S S O E Architects L . L . C . PROJECT INFORMATION: 1001 MADISON AVE. TIGARD , OR TOLEDO,OH 43604 (419) 255-3830 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. TIGARD, OREGON 97223 REFERENCE SYMBOLS ARCHITECTURAL B A0.0 COVER SHEET B A0.1 LIFE SAFETY PLAN AND CODE DATA DETAIL IDENTIFICATION A1.1 FLOOR PLAN PROJECT LOCATION __ MATERIAL OR WORK DIVISION INDICATION ROOM NAME AND NUMBER INDICATION A1.2 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN DETAIL OR ENLARGED RM NAME At.3 FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT PLAN PLAN IDENTIFICATION EXISTING MATERIAL NEW MATERIAL 0 At A E11SH LEGEND - NUMBER �— WEST P6RTLAND �r��.i A1.5 FINISH PLAN Re XX CLIENT INFORMATION: SHEET IDENTIFICATION A1.6 SIGNAGE PLAN AND LEGEND BRADLEY .;.Y--- NUMBER (INDICATES SHE ET AXXX � NOTE LEADER INDICATION A2.1 DOOR AND WINDOW ELEVATIONS AND DETAILS acfe v -� s✓` s� o NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS — WALL TYPE INDICATION II r F A3.1 DETAILED TOILET ROOMS DRAWN ) WALL TYPE A4.1 WALL SECTIONS _ IDENTIFICATIONA6.1 NTERIOR ELEVATIONS \`0 JI SECTION IDENTIFICATION AS NOTED IN PARTITION A6.2 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS Q WF ST SECTION OR ENLARGED SCHEDULE A6.3 CASEWORK SECTIONS y � POPN ND PAax � PLAN IDENTIFICATION DOOR NUMBER INDICATION A6.4 CASEWORK SECTIONS a.tzna= NUMBER X AZ1 TYPICAL MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS AMERICAN FAMILY SHEET IDENTIFICATION NORTH INDICATION A9.1 SPECIFICATIONS NUMBER (INDICATES SHEET AXE DOOR SWING A9.2 SPECIFICATIONS ' NA9.3 SPECIFICATIONS CARE UMBER WHERE SECTION IS v+s t 1 Pottia" DRAWN ) Cammundy N A9.4 SPECIFICATIONS A9,5 SPECIFICATIONS PLAN. SECTION AND DETAIL IDENTIFICATION 1001 A9.6 SPECIFICATIONS 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD 11 �� %. DOOR NUMBER A9] SPECIFICATIONS BIRMINGHAM' AL raga OR 97223 PLAN, SECTION AND DETAIL IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (SAME NUMBER ON SHEET WHERE DRAWN OR CUT) A9.8 SPECIFICATIONS 35242 �us� SrDae r � �- ? ELECTRICAL 3 CLIENT PROJECT NO: > +.. H5 FLOOR PLAN PERMITS / SUBMITTALS E3.1 FLOOR PLAN - POWER&TECHNOLOGY � . A101 SCALE: 1/8" = 1'-0" BULLETIN /ADDENDUM IDENTIFICATION Q BULLETIN NUMBER IF APPLICABLE - SEPARATE PERMITS AND DEFERRED ON SHEET WHERE DETAIL IS DRAWN, ( ) DESIGN SUBMITTALS BY CONTRACTOR OR OTHERS: n INDICATES SHEET BUILDING SIGNAGE AND SDE FIXTURES AND ITE MONUMENT SIGNAGE. AE NUMBER WHERE DETAIL IS CUT Q ADDENDUM (LETTER) AUTOMATIC FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM. S S O E IS ONLY RESPONSIBLE FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS TAS INSPECTOR FOR PLAN APPROVAL(TEXAS ONLY) FOR ARCHITECTURAL. ELEVATION LOCATION IDENTIFICATION CERTIFICATE OF OCCUPANCY MUST BE OBTAINED BY wE sTWORK POINT TENANT PRIOR TO OCCUPYING THE BUILDING PLUMBING MECHANICAL A N D ELEVATION IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ALL SHOP DRAWINGS AND SUBMITTALS REQUIRED HEREIN f FRAFOR NCHISEE EW AND CORD RUCTIOFAFNAGER. RATE, ELECTRICAL IS NOT IN SSOE COLUMN IDENTIFICATION FRANCHISEE AND CONSTRUCTION MANAGER. FILLED AREA EXISTING COLUMN DEFERRED SUBMITTALS ARE FOR THE REVIEW OF THE SCOPE O F SERVICES. ALL 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL A SHEET IDENTIFICATION INDICATES XX IDENTIFICATION AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION. NO. DATE SUBJECT NUMBER DIRECTION OF BUBBLE A REVISION OR ISSUE VIEW OWNER REQUIREMENTS SCOPE OF DEMOLITION BY NEW COLUMN SS 1 Madistects, L.L.C. SHELL ARCHITECT CIDA. 1001 Madison XX Toledo, OH 43604 IDENTIFICATION BUBBLE T (419) 255-3830 1. CONTRACTORTOCOMPLY WITH PROPERTY OWNER'S CONTRACTOR TO DIMENSIONING TENANT CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS PROJECT NO: 021 -01005-00 11/4" �I 2" I 11/4" COORDINATE ALL FINAL — PROJECT MANAGER: M. ALFIERI � — DRAWINGS DESIGNED: T. MCMAHON CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER o DIMENSIONS ARE TO FACE OF FINISH WALL- UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE DRAWING TITLE o COVER SHEET of O `P `m VICINITY MAP "'REFER TO MECHANICAL, PLUMBING, AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL SYMBOLS"' F Al N Uo A0.0 SCALE NOT TO SCALE DRAWING NO. C N uj A0. 0 � Q mo 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 CODE SUMMARY PROJECT: AMERICAN FAMILY CARE-TENANT FIT OUT O O 9soee SSOE PROJECT NO.: 021-01005-00 SUMMARY OF WORK: r THIS PROJECT CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING: \ OB/GYN EXA L - � � 17 1' ' �,�; IC 6,094 SF OF INTERIOR FIT-OUT FOR ANEW PROFESSIONAL PHYSICIAN'S OFFICE (ADMINISTRATIVE AREA, LOBBY, CONSULTANTS: 6 EXAM 5 EXAM 4 EXAM 3 RESTROOMS, EXAM ROOMS, NURSE STATION WITH WORK AREA,AND X-RAY). 114 ASSOCIATED MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL,AND PLUMBING WORK _.-._._- EXISTING BUILDING INFORMATION: (PER DOCUMENTATION PROVIDED BY OWNER) �^r< I / � ( OCCUPANCY: B ��� 1 `-� t ,� i \ � NO. OF STORIES: 1 1 ��/ ; i CONSTRUCTION TYPE: VB c - OWNER: AMERICAN FAMILY CARE 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. COMMON PATH OF TIGARD, OREGON 97223 C CORRIDOR L_ _ EGRESS TRAVEL __ _ C DISTANCE 43'-8" I TENANT FIT OUT: SECTION 1: APPLICABLE CODES i { 2019 OREGON STRUCTURAL SPECIALTY CODE (OSSC) 2021 OREGON ENERGY EFFICIENCY SPECIALTY CODE(OEESC) 2021 OREGON ELECTRICAL SPECIALTY CODE (OESC) 2019 OREGON MECHANICAL SPECIALTY CODE (GMSC) PATIENT - " NURSE I 2021 OREGON PLUMBING SPECIALTY CODE (OPSC) SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY: TOILET STATION I ACCESSIBILITY-2019 OREGON STRUCTURAL SPECIALTY CODE CHAPTER 11 i PROCEDURE SECTION 2: TENANT/BUILDING INFORMATION / i �) I 115 �L>✓' � AR ' USE GROUP: B-BUSINESS (PROFESSIONAL MEDICAL OFFICE) $ 0 Q t ACCESSORY OCCUPANCY: PER 2019 OSCC SECTION 303.1.2, SMALL ASSEMBLY AREAS SHALL BE CLASSIFIED AS LOUISE M. GROUP B WHEN <750 SF IN AREA OR HAVE AN OCCUPANT LOAD<50 PERSONS Gy SCHLATTER �(] w LAB/ LOBBY/WAIT AREA= 553 SQUARE FEET �" y SEATING CAPACITY= 33 TOLEDO, OH COR i J', ARI-11622 0'$ C103 INCIDENTAL USE: STORAGE <100 SF(NO SEPARATION REQUIRED PER 2019 OSSC TABLE 509) 1EGRESS TRAVEL DISTANCE CONSTRUCTION TYPE: VB 29'-0" 7J� �� UTILITY -- Gu- FIRE PROTECTION: N/A HEIGHT/AREA LIMITATIONS: EXISTING TO REMAIN (26'-8") 09/02/2021 _ SECTION 3: TENANT/OCCUPANT LOAD PROJECT INFORMATION: D USE GROUP AREA LOAD FACTOR OCCUPANT LOAD W OFFICE B-BUSINESS 6,094 SF 1:150 40 TIGARD OR I PHYSICIANS V) f BREAK ROOM 107 o SECTION 4: TENANT/MEANS OF EGRESS 1o4c — Wbo CORRIDOR 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. - u�O C102 (PER 2019 OSSC SECTION 1016.2/TABLE 1017.2, EGRESS BASED ON OCCUPANT LOAD AND COMMON PATH OF EGRESS EXAM EXAM 2 TRAVEL DISTANCE.) TIGARD, OREGON 97223 \ ;� w X-RAY OCCUPANCY/SPACE MAX OCCUPANT LOAD CALCULATED OCCUPANT LOAD EXIT ACCESS \*CP?�O OF SPACE OCCUPANT LOAD (MINUS LOBBY) TRAVEL DISTANCE w _ W B-BUSINESS 40 33 GUESTS(LOBBY) 6 GUESTS AT EXAM 200 FT y t . +6 GUESTS AT EXAM +9 STAFF +9 STAFF = 15 OCCUPANTS =48 OCCUPANTS TOTAL B TOTAL EXITS REQUIRED (PER 2019 OSSC 1016.1):2 (EXISTING TO REMAIN) EXIT ACCESS AND TRAVEL DISTANCE: TRAVEL DISTANCE TO EXITS: 200 FT MAX(TABLE 1017.2 WITHOUT SPRINKLER) — COMMON PATH OF TRAVEL: 75 FT MAX(TABLE 1006.2.1 WITHOUT SPRINKLER, OL>30) ADMIN CHECK-OUT TRIAGE 1 DEAD END CORRIDOR: 20 FT MAX(SECTION 1020.4.2) CLIENT INFORMATION: - 104A �� ' C101 103A % EXIT CAPACITY: (PER 2019 OSSC SECTION 1005.3.1 & 1005.3.2) MANAGER - DOORS: 0.2 INCHES PER OCCUPANT(MIN. CLEAR WIDTH 32 INCHES) CORRIDORS: 0.2 INCHES PER OCCUPANT(MIN. CLEAR WIDTH 44 INCHES O - fl ' STAIRS: 0.3 INCHES PER OCCUPANT -.- TESTING ACTUAL PROVIDED FOR DOOR COMPONANT= 102 INCHES EDACTUAL PROVIDED FOR CORRIDOR=49 INCHES o o ' � AMERICAN FAMILY SECTION 5: TENANT/MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS OCCUPANCY SEPARATION: N/A(ONLY 1 TENANT IN BUILDING) CARE 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD VESTIBULE LOBBY 5��3 TOIILET 1 FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES: BIRMINGHAM, IRVIAGIAV , AL Li EXIT STAIR N/A ELEVATOR N/A 35242 SHAFTS N/A FIRE BARRIERS 2 HOURS (PER 2019 OSSC TABLE 707.3.10) CLIENT PROJECT NO: SMOKE BARRIERS 1 HOUR (PER 2019 OSSC 709.3) ------- \ HAZARDOUS SPACES N/A CORRIDORS 1 HOUR(PER 2019 OSSC. TABLE 1020.1, OCCUPANT LOAD SERVED BY CORRIDOR GREATER THAN 30(WITHOUT SPRINKLER) -21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL / T i INI H REQUIREMENTS LIFE SAFETY PLAN LEGEND NO. DATE SUBJECT A REVISION OR ISSUE NON-RATED PARTITION � - SSOEArchitects, L.L.C. WALL FLOOR AND CEILING SHALL NOT EXCEED FLAME SPREAD 1001 Madison Avenue CLASSIFICATIONS IN TABLE 803.13. ALL APPLIED FINISHES SHALL MEET EXISTING ONE-HOUR Toledo OH 43604 `H OR EXCEED THE FLAME SPREAD AND DEVELOPED RATING SMOKE RATED PARTITION T. (419}255-3830 / REQUIREMENTS AS SET FORTH IN THE BUILDING CODE. o CLASS A: FLAME SPREAD OF 0-25; SMOKE DEVELOPED 0-450 EXISTING TWO-HOUR PROJECT NO: 021 -01005-00 a CLASS B: FLAME SPREAD OF 26-75; SMOKE DEVELOPED 0-450 '"'__" RATED PARTITION w fPROJECT MANAGER: M. ALFIERI 2 CLASS C: FLAME SPREAD OF 76-200; SMOKE DEVELOPED 0-450 e T. MMAHON ¢i ull liull U DESIGNED: . c _- - EXIT o __- TABLE 803.13 NON-SPRINKLERED CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER o 1== - -_ik FIRE EXTINGUISHER FEC DRAWING TITLE: o_ OCCUPANCY VERTICAL EXITS EXIT ACCESS CORRIDORS ROOMSAND CABINET LIFE SAFETY PLAN AND EXIT PASSAGEWAYS AND OTHER EXITWAYS ENCLOSED SPACES o¢ COMMON PATH OF p 1p N B A B C --���� EGRESS TRAVEL CODE DATA vo Al LIFE SAFETY PLAN A0.1 SCALE: 1!4"= 1'-0" EGRESS TRAVEL ~ DISTANCE DRAWING NO: ¢ N Co A0. 1 � w 2Q m0 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES 9,_6„ pm 8,_5, 8'_5" 4]Lh' m 1. FLOOR PLAN DRAWINGS ARE COMPOSITES IS EXISTING CONSTRUCTION TO REMAIN AND NEW OO 9soea 171 177 TYPICAL EXAM ROOM CONSTRUCTION. EXISTING CONSTRUCTION IS SHOWN IN LIGHTER, OUTLINE FORM. DEMOLITION AND/OR NEW CONSTRUCTION IS INDICATED WITH HEAVIER LINEWORK AND MAY ADDITIONALLY BE IDENTIFIED BY NOTE, KEYNOTE, LARGER SCALE DETAIL REFERENCE, OR MATERIAL PATTERN (REFER ALSO TO LEGEND). 61 Al B1Al B1 Al g, A4 I EXAM 3 I 2. DO NOT SCALE DRAWINGS. WORK FROM DIMENSIONS SHOWN. IF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION IS NEEDED, A4.1 114 OR WHERE DRAWINGS OR DRAWING SCALE APPEAR TO CONFLICT WITH INDICATED DIMENSIONS, BRING TO THE ATTENTION OF THE ARCHITECT FOR REVIEW. CONSULTANTS: I 4 I 3. THE EXISTING BUILDING, AND ITS SUBSEQUENT CONSTRUCTION MODIFICATIONS,ARE ASSUMED TO BE IN OB/GYN EXAM EXAM 5 EXAM 4 6 O n FULL COMPLIANCE WITH APPLICABLE CODES AND REGULATIONS IN EFFECT AT THE TIME OF F-1 1 112 113 3 A6.1 1 I CONSTRUCTION. I 2 I 4. NOTIFY THE OWNER AND ARCHITECT OF ALL CODE AND/OR CONSTRUCTION DEFICIENCIES DISCOVERED OR UNCOVERED IN THE COURSE OF CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS. _ Ji TV AND WALL BRACKET AT 6'-4"ABOVE Al LDL4 Al q, FINISH FLOOR. PROVIDE 36"x 36" 5. ALL WALL DIMENSIONS ARE TO FINISH FACE OF WALL UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. ¢ Q21I BLOCKING-TYPICAL AT ALL EXAM ROOMS6. WHERE NEW WALL CONSTRUCTION ABUTS EXISTING, IN-LINE, ON PLANS, DIRECTLY ALIGN NEW FINISH WALL SURFACE(S)WITH EXISTING. C OWNER PROVIDED STORAGE g1 CORRIDOR 13 7. INSTALL NEW CEILING. REFER TO SHEET A1.2 FOR CEILING TYPES AND HEIGHTS. CEYE CHARELECTRICAL PANELS - REFER g, 8. PROVIDE DUST BARRIER TO SEPARATE CONSTRUCTION AREA FROM THE REST OF THE BUILDING. PROVIDE TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS TEMPORARY FILTERS TO PREVENT THE SPREAD OF DUST THROUGH THE BUILDING VIA THE RETURN AIR 6 11'-3 1/2" 4'-5 1/2" A6.2 10'-11" " SYSTEM. UPON COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS, REMOVE BARRIERS AND REPAIR ANY I OWNER PROVIDED STORAGE DAMAGE CAUSED BY THEIR INSTALLATION OR PRESENCE TO"LIKE NEW"CONDITION. 9. PATCH AND REPAIR OPENINGS IN AND/OR PENETRATIONS THROUGH EXISTING FIRE RATED ASSEMBLIES I 61 Al o ^\1 AND SMOKE BARRIER ASSEMBLIES. MAINTAIN RATING -TYPICAL. I U Qry 5 6.2 q Al ° 10. SELECTIVELY DEMOLISH EXISTING FLOOR SLAB AS REQUIRED TO INSTALL NEW CONDUIT, PIPING, ETC. g3 REFER ALSO TO MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. PATCH AND REPAIR SLABS TO MATCH SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY: A3.1 PATIENT I 3 AED EXISTING. NURSE TOILET CABINET- 61 STATION - 11. NO SMOKING IS ALLOWED INSIDE THE EXISTING BUILDING, INCLUDING THE CONSTRUCTION SITE IN ITS 110 I A6.2 4 REFER TO ENTIRETY, UNLESS SEPARATELY PERMITTED BY THE OWNER AT DESIGNATED SMOKING AREAS. o Al 109 I SHEET A1.3 1✓D A U I y O 12. INDICATION(S) FOR RATED WALL CONSTRUCTION AS SHOWN ON REFLECTED CEILING PLAN(S)TAKE Stiff RC B3 B4 A6.2 2 PRECEDENCE OVER WALL CONSTRUCTION TYPE NOTED ON FLOOR PLAN DRAWINGS, IN CASE OF 5 �l ±WATER A4.1 A4.1 CONFLICT BETWEEN THE TWO. �y~ LOUISE M. �,� p .' 4W SCHLA=R y m IFc? PROCEDURE 13. VERIFY THE DIMENSIONS, LOCATIONS, ELEVATIONS AND ARRANGEMENT OF ALL ITEMS ASSOCIATED WITH HEATER ON 3'-5 3/4" 115 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND RELATED MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL WORK. TOLEDO, OH FORM ABOVE w LL Cl 14. REFER TO A3.1 FOR ALL TOILET ROOM FIXTURE LAYOUT AND DIMENSIONS, TYPICAL. `�'J� ARI-11622 �0 - - a9 81 LAB/ 7 3"RADIUS CORNER AT 9 15. INSTALL SOLAR GARD TRUEVUE 5(INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS) ON F ^�n ��qq f („�r o CORRIDO TRANSACTION Al STOREFRONT GLAZING THAT IS COVERED WITH INTERIOR WALLS, TYPICAL. jI�(X 1� l TLi UTILITY PHYSICIAN C103 A6.2 COUNTERTOP-TYPICAL A6 2 09/02/2021 B1 108 D-108 OFFICE PASS-THROUGH DOOR 16. LOCK AND SEAL ALL EXISTING EXTERIOR DOORS THAT ARE BEING COVERED BY NEW WALL PARTITIONS, 107 8 TYPICAL. A3 X-RAY B5 co 17. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE BLOCKING FOR CASEWORK AND EQUIPMENT. INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER PROJECT INFORMATION: VIEWING 2'-8"MIN q Al n io STANDARDS.ALL WOOD BLOCKING SHALL BE FIRE RETARDANT TREATED-TYPICAL. o T - - T - T - T - AREA �"MI v C4 0 ° Al ao1168 18. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY AND MAINTAIN EXISTING FIRE RATINGS. OWNER PROVIDED o T I GA R D, O R STORAGE 1 19. BUILDING SIGNAGE BY OWNER. REFER TO ELECTRICAL FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 1'-91/2" 3'-1" 7'-2" - 8'-5" 8'-0" A-109 ,�35 `_" v O 9 ] � X: 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. BREAK ROOM A, � FLOOR PLAN LEGEND A, 12 A6.2 ,a eTIGARD, OREGON 97223 `? Al 1� Al 4'-2 2'-5" 0 11 EXAM 1 EXAM 2 U _ _ 10 A6.1 CORRIDOR C3 EXISTING CONSTRUCTION WINDOW TAG- TYPICAL EXAM ROOM Jr 82 - 105 106 o C102 XRAY TO REMAIN Q REFER� FOR SHEET LAYOUT. ALL ROOMS TO BE SIMILAR B2 A4.1 ELEVATIONS OR OPPOSITE HAND. 116A REFER TO EXAM 3 A4.1 65 ROOM NAME NEW ROOM ROOM 114 FOR TYPICAL B1 a Al Al E-116A FLOOR PLAN NOTES B At 101 NUMBER] NAMEAND AND REFERENCES. B Y J-104C Bl "' Al NEW PARTITION PARTITION TYPE 2'-6" 2 C3 ADMIN H-104A TRIAGE 1 B1 13'-7" INDICATOR-REFER TO A4.1 104A 103A A CLEAR HOLD CONSTRUCTION PARTITION TYPE LEGEND MANAGER CHECK-OUT ^ Cl g DOOR TAG-REFER TO CLIENT INFORMATION: ,pqg G-1046 C101 / ` 00 A2.1 FOR DOOR TYPE FIRE EXTINGUISHER O y"o K-103A A6.2 B1 DOOR NUMBER FEC CABINET A6.1 6 / ` / 6 DOOR TYPE 1 ^ O A41 q1 7 5 A6.1 Ie/, O K-1036 `\ OWNER PROVIDED STORAGE PLAN NOTES � 1. NEW WALLS TO BE WALL TYPE Cl, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. INSTALL SOLAR GARD TRUEVUE 5 ON 9 A61 TESTING ( STOREFRONT GLAZINGIS 2. MAINTAIN MINIMUM CLEARANCE REQUIRED BY CODE AT ALL ELECTRICAL PANELS, TYP. AMERICAN FAMILY Al 1036 Al 1� COVERED WITH NTERIORH F AT WALLS, Cl / B2 TYPICAL 3. INSTALL CORNER GUARDS AND END GUARDS AT ALL OUTSIDE CORNERS AND WALL ENDS. Al a a �� CARE 6-03/4" '-31/2" V-5" '-O' 6-5" '-0' 3'-103/4" F-101A / 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD 4 SIDES 4 SIDES PARTITION TYPE LEGEND BIRMINGHAM, AL 81 8 B1 Al TOILET 1 � ��;� 35242 102 e, / B1 CLIENT PROJECT NO: VESTIBULE 1016 C 6- C-102 9 A4 Bl qq_, BOTTOM OF STRUCTURE BOTTOM OF STRUCTURE BOTTOM OF STRUCTURE EX-101A EX-101 B j% I I SLIP LEG TRACK I SLIP LEG TRACK SLIP LEG TRACK 3 1/2"SOUND ATTENUATION BLANKETS EXTENDING 4'-0" �X� EACH SIDE OF WALL Co U A3 A6.1 LOBBY / All CEILING LINE LL * O 101A CEILING LINE B1 j CEILING LINE � n U "A1" =47/8" "AS' -4 7/8" " _ A2" 71/4" "A4" = 71/4" B1" =4 1/4" "65" -4 1/4" "Cl" -47/8" "B2" =6 1/2" "C3" =4 7/8" 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL A METAL STUD FRAMING "C4" = 71/4" NO. DATE SUBJECT AT 16"ON CENTER ' A I REVISION OR ISSUE ALIGN FACE OF GYPSUM BOARD WITH EDGE OF SOUND ATTENUATION METAL STUD FRAMING SSOE Architects, L.L.C. EXISTING MULLION -TYPICAL INSULATION AT 16" ON CENTER 1001 Madison Avenue Toledo, OH 43604 / 5/8"GYPSUM BOARD 5/8"GYPSUM BOARD T. (419) 255-3830 COORDINATE WITH ELECTRICAL.ALL ON OCCUPIED SIDE ; TV AND WALL BRACKET AT ELECTRICAL BOXES ON OPPOSITE OF WALL 7'-2"ABOVE FINISH FLOOR. i SIDES OF THE WALL MUST NOT BE IN I METAL STUD FRAMING PROJECT NO: 021 -01 OO5-OO a- LLJ PROVIDE 36"x 36" BLOCKING THE SAME STUD VOID. OFFSET ALL I FLOOR RUNNER TRACK AT 16"ON CENTER PROJECT MANAGER: M. ALFIERI BOXES ON OPPOSITE SIDES. I ACOUSTICAL SEALANT 5/8"GYPSUM BOARD DESIGNED: T. McMAHON i B1 ' FLOOR RUNNER TRACK I AT FLOOR AND WALL EACH SIDE CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER o ACOUSTICAL SEALANT AT EACH SIDE FLOOR RUNNER TRACK o - - FLOOR AND WALL EACH SIDE Ll TOP OF FLOOR DRAWING TITLE:TOP OF FLOOR TOP OF FLOORFLOOR PLAN ao AlA2 B1 3 5/8" METAL STUD C1 3 5/8" METAL STUD WALL a 9 N 3 5/8" METAL STUD 6" METAL STUD o, B2 6"METAL STUD C3 OWNER PROVIDED SHEII BOARD,LEAD LINED GYPSUM O DING REPORT/3 5/8" v"o q, FLOOR PLAN LEAD LINED GYPSUM BOARD, REFER TO OWNER LL v A3 PROVIDED SHIELDING REPORT/3 5/8" METAL STUD METAL STUD DRAWING NO: ¢ a A1.1 SCALE: 1/4"= 1'-0" B5 LEAD LINED GYPSUM BOARD, REFER TO OWNERLEAD LINED GYPSUM BOARD, REFER TO o rn A4 LEAD LINED GYPSUM BOARD, REFER TO OWNER PROVIDED SHIELDING REPORT/3 5/8" METAL STUD C4 OWNER PROVIDED SHEILDING REPORT/6" A 1 . 1 M Lu PROVIDED SHIELDING REPORT/6" METAL STUD METAL STUD mo 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 REFLECTED CEILING PLAN LEGEND 2'X2'SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING OO 9soee SYSTEM - REFER TO SHEET A1.4 FOR FINISH LEGEND OB7/GY EXAMEXA 5 EXAM 4 EXdM 3 GYPSUM BOARD CEILING 11 1 3 1 4 CONSULTANTS: lCURTAIN TRACK-REFER TO DETAIL XX" CEILING HEIGHT ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR EXP EXPOSED TO STRUCTURE ABOVE ® SUPPLY AIR GRILLE- REFER TO MECHANICAL DRAWINGS COR IDOR RETURN AIR GRILLE-REFER TO MECHANICAL C C1 4 DRAWINGS SUPPLY AIR PLENUM -REFER TO MECHANICAL C DRAWINGS LIGHT FIXTURE-REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS B3 11 PAf EKIT •a NUR E A1.2 TOILET r' p SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY: ,0 I o UNDER CABINET LIGHT- REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS Q DOWNLIGHT-REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS OD W :, 0 I p ® EXIT LIGHT-REFER TO ELECTRICAL 5lc$ ARc4 �y� LOUISE M. � UTILITY � 8 L – – _L _L – – J I MOUNTING PLATE FOR CEILING MOUNTED �W SCHLATTER n I FIXTURE - FIXTURE PROVIDED BY EQUIPMENT SUPPLIER. MATERIAL AS RECOMMENDED BY • TOLEDO, OH B/ MANUFACTURER HUNG FROM ROOF STRUCTURE WITH UNI-STRUT AND RODS. TO BE STABILIZED TO ARI-11622 C 03 PREVENT ANY MOVEMENT. CEILINGNVALL MOUNTED STRIPLIGHT-REFER TO V/11��� �F����r ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS 09IO2I2021 .� _Lm XRA 0 o O VIEWIN RATED WALL LEGEND f AREA Q PROJECT INFORMATION: 116B PHYSICIANS - =.a EXISTING ONE-HOUR RATED PARTITION 4' •� O FICE 4 1 d, 07 ®_ EXISTING TWO-HOUR RATED PARTITION T I GA R D, OR 0 � � REFLECTED CEILING PLAN NOTES 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. TIGARD, OREGON 97223 R•; X_ y 1. CEILING GRID CENTERED IN ROOMS. MAINTAIN 6" MINIMUM CEILING O , . ' C . O- TILES AT PERIMETER. 2. REFER TO ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL DRAWINGS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. 3. REFER TO FINISH LEGEND FOR CEILING FINISHES. B B ® 4. ALL CEILING HEIGHTS TO BE 8'-0"A.F.F. UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. 5. ALL SOFFITS TO BE T-6"A.F.F UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. RIAS _ 6. ALL LINEAR SUPPLY DIFFUSERS IN LOBBY 101 TO BE V-6" O.C. FROM FACE OF ADJACENT WALL-TYPICAL 1_© CLIENT INFORMATION: � . 104B %� Z INSTALL SOLAR GARD TRUEVUE 5(INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER 104 C1 1 WRITTEN INSTRUCTIONS) ON STOREFRONT GLAZING THAT IS �Q• Fj'•_' .`, COVERED WITH INTERIOR WALLS, TYPICAL. •' � o'i - Cpl ' ' j J TE$TIfNS�i� cP 2X BLOCKING CEILING SYSTEEUED AMERICAN FAMILY REFER TO RE cif :'. , - • v; �p CEILING PLAN :p• W • - -' - - _ CARE REFER TO CEILING A6.4 "a PLAN FOR HEIGHT 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD � '_ ', _.'-.TOILET 1�• ''.i -; .._- '.Q , - ,os ' .,,: : � ;: :, - '. . : a', 102 • cuRTAwTRACK- BIRMINGHAM, AL _ REFER TO REFLECTED CEILING PLAN 35242 CURTAIN CID!�• ,• < REFER LEGEND O FINISH CLIENT PROJECT NO: ,� CURTAIN TRACK DETAIL EQ TYP. SCALE: 1 1/2"= 1'-0" - ,o - ` -� - ••LOQ . :' •" .•., -• - - - - •.101 • - • ,- 3 5/8" METAL STUD, 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL DIAGONAL BRACE AT ( / / I I NO. DATE SUBJECT A - `O - •• ,.•; - - - 4'-0"ON CENTER a= �. A REVISION OR ISSUE SSOE Architects, L.L.C. Tole Madison Avenue ' •,_ • Toledo, OH 43604 T. (419)255-3830 PROJECT NO: 021 -01005-00 EL _ •• , r • ,' • ' , ,•M1 •' • , , y- „ ; . •• ,,- , uj CEILING HEIGHT PROJECT MANAGER: M. ALFIERI � CEILING SYSTEM - — — — — — — — — — — — — — REFER TO CEILING PLAN REFER TO REFLECTED DESIGNED: T. McMAHON ao CEILING PLAN CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER o EQ 6'-0" 8'-0" 6'-0" 6'-0" EQ — —- SOFFIT HEIGHT 5/8"GYPSUM BOARD ON o 3 5/8" METAL STUD REFER TO REFLECTED CEILING PLAN REFER TO CEILING PLAN DRAWING TITLE: FRAMING AT 16"ON REFLECTED CEILING as N CENTER p o 'L' BEAD PLAN o REFLECTED CEILING PLAN A' A3 SOFFIT DETAIL A1.2 SCALE 1/4"= 1'-0" N 1.TYP. SCALE: 1 1/2"= V-0" DRAWING NO: ¢ a A1 .2 r`D,ui ma 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 FIXTURES, FURNISHINGS, AND EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE C14N MODEL OO 9soe, SK00 DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER NUMBER COLOR SUPPLIED BY INSTALLED BY COMMENTS/LOCATION TYPICAL SK1 HAND SANITIZER DISPENSER AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE GC ADA COMPLIANT(a4"DEPTH) OO ------ - ------ EXAM ROOM SK2 GLOVE BOX AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE GC SK3 SHARPS CONTAINER AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE GC El PL1 FN4 I SK4 DIAGNOSTIC WALL BOARD AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE GC SK5 SAMPLE PASS THROUGH BOBRICK B-50517 GC GC CONSULTANTS: OB/GYN EXAM FN7 SK4 SK6 REFRIGERATOR#2 (LAB) AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE VENDOR LAB 6I FN1 I SK7 REFRIGERATOR#3(LAB) SUPPLIED BY OWNER OWNER OWNER LAB 111 11 SK8 EYE TEST CABINET AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE GC MOUNTED AT 64"AFF TO 20/20 LINE SSK4 EXAM 5 EXAM 4 SK3 OF CHART.EXAM 3 SK9 REFRIGERATOR#4(COFFEE BAR) SUPPLIED BY OWNER OWNER OWNER COFFEE BAR (32"H MAXIMUM) K3 112 113 I 114 I SK10 AED CABINET AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE GC MOUNTED AT 48"AFF TO TOP OF UNIT HANDLE FN6 SK11 PROCEDURE LIGHT AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE GC PROCEDURE ROOM SK1 \' ❑, FN7 PL1 SK12 DIGITAL SCALE WITH HEIGHT ROD AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE GC TL8 H TL8 TL1 SK13 FLAT SCREEN N SUPPLIED BY OWNER OWNER GC N AND WALL BRACKET MOUNTED O AT 64"AFF TYPICAL AT EXAM ROOMS AND T-2"AFF TYPCIAL AT C _ ' LOBBY. PROVIDE 36"X 36" C SK8 N M N BLOCKING AND RECESSED ELEC Y AND DATA OUTLET U) SK14 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINET JL INDUSTRIES ACADEMY ALUMINUM GC GC SEMI-RECESSED CORRIDOR SERIES 1027 C104 r_ SK15 MOP HOLDER E.L. MUSTEE 65.600 GC GC ---- SK10 SK4 SK17 MICROWAVE SUPPLIED BY OWNER OWNER OWNER BREAK ROOM(18"H MAXIMUM) SK18 DISH WASHER SUPPLIED BY OWNER OWNER OWNER BREAK ROOM SK19 REFRIGERATOR#1 (BREAK ROOM) SUPPLIED BY OWNER OWNER OWNER BREAK ROOM SK20 ANTHEM 40KW GENERATOR AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE VENDOR X-RAY TL1 CABINET SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY: PATIENT I FN5 — FN5 FN 7 PL4 SK21 WALL STAND AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE VENDOR X-RAY TOILET SK1 TL2 SK22 X-RAY TABLE AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE VENDOR X-RAY SK23 APRON RACK AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE VENDOR XRAY. MOUNT 5'-0"AFF TO SK11 SK3 CENTERLINE OF UNIT i Y NURSE LL FURNITURE SCHEDULE �,� LOUISE M. �� n STATION 11 SK2 5 r m 109 Z — I MODEL W SCHLATTER FN000 DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER NUMBER COLOR SUPPLIED BY INSTALLED BY COMMENTS/LOCATION FN1 GUEST CHAIR AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE VENDOR LOBBY, TRIAGE,ADMIN, DOCTORS • TOLEDO,OH OFFICE, EXAM cP PL9 f i FF-N87 ? ARI-11622 UTILITY SK7 1 FN2 END TABLE AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE TBD LOBBY 9 Cyd 108 Y Y Y Y f O FN3 2-SEAT BENCH AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE VENDOR LOBBY AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE VENDOR EXAM 77� --- --- -" Y a ' cO J PROCEDURE FN4 EXAM TABLEFN5 TASK CHAIR SUPPLIED BY OWNER OWNER OWNER TRIAGE,ADMIN. DOCTOR OFFICE, PL3 ~ a ~ m m LJ 115 NURSE STATION 09/02/2021 LAB/ FN6 GYN EXAM TABLE AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE VENDOR EXAM FSK 1-9] FN10 F�ZB _ \` a CORRIDOR SK20 F147 PNEUMATIC STOOL AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE VENDOR TRIAGE, EXAM, X-RAY, PROCEDURE PROJECT INFORMATION: SK1 C103 X-RAY F148 STRETCHER CHANGE AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE VENDOR PROCEDURE SK15 _ F149 BREAK ROOM TABLE AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE VENDOR BREAK ROOM TL1 FN9 VIEWINGAREA FN10 BREAK ROOM CHAIR AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT CORPORATE VENDOR BREAK ROOM T�z --- LL _ FN7 1166 ) TOILET ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE TIGARD, OR ___._ i� II SK18 FN10 I PHYSICIANS -- MODEL 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. �� OFFICE ' 0 TL1 L00 SOAP DISPENSER DESCRIPTION AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT MANUFACTURER NUMBER COLOR CORPORATE SUPPLIED Y GC TALLED BY COMMENTS/LOCATION TIGARD OREGON 97223 e ® SK22 SK17 i 107 � � , TL2 PAPER TOWEL DISPENSER AFC STARTUP EQUIPMENT LOCAL VENDOR GC $- CORRIDOR _ I TL3 HAND DRYER BOBRICK B-750 LOCAL VENDOR GC BREAK ROOM FNS TL5 18"X36"SS FRAMED MIRROR BOBRICK B-165 1836 GC GC PROVIDE FRT PLYWOOD BACKER P 104C J FN5 �, —- EXAM 2 C102 SK23 X-RAY I AT MIRROR. SHIM MIRROR ABOVE -- _ _ ___ EXAM 1 106 j 116A TILE FINISH, AND PAINT TO MATCH 7 105 ADJACENT WALL FINISH. FASTEN MIRROR STRAIGHT AND PLUMB TO B WALL,AND SEAL ALL SEAMS. B TL6 TOILET PAPER DISPENSER BOBRICK B-274 GC GC \\ I I TL7 SANITARY NAPKIN DISPOSAL BOBRICK B-270 GC GC / TL8 ROBE/COAT HOOK BOBRICK 8-672 GC GC FINISH NOTE 14-POLISHED SS FINISH (SS FINISH IS 6727) TL9 BABY CHANGING TABLE BOBRICK KB-200 GREY GC GC ADA MOUNTING HEIGHT PER MANUF. CLIENT INFORMATION: ADMIN TL18 18"VERTICAL GRAB BAR BOBRICK B-6806X18 GC GC TL36 36" HORIZONTAL GRAB BAR BOBRICK B-6806X36 GC GC FN1 104A - TL42 42" HORIZONTAL GRAB BAR IBOBRICK B-6806X42 I GC GC TRIAGE 1 10G / PLUMBING FIXTURE SCHEDULE O MODEL MANAGER FN5 PL1 / PL00 DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER NUMBER SUPPLIED BY INSTALLED BY COMMENTS 104B CHECK-OUT FN5 FN5 C101 SK14 PL1 SINK ELKAY LRAD151755 GC GC DELTA 101 LF-WK FAUCET, ELKAY LK18 OUTLET AMERICAN FAMILY TESTING , TL2FITTING, ZURN Z880OPC KEYSTOP i FN5i 1036 PL2A SINK, MOP MUSTEE 62M GC GC _. ------ TL1 PL2B FAUCET-UTILITY MUSTEE 63.600A GC GC CARE --- SK1 PL4 WATER HEATER GC GC SIZED PER SPACE 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD PL4 SINK ELKAY LRADDQ252265 GC GC ELKAY GOURMET SERIES FAUCET MODEL LKGT1042, ELKAY LK-99 STOPPER, ZURN Z8700P-TRAP,ZURN Z880OPC KEY STOP, BIRMINGHAM, AL INSINKETOR EVOLUTION j TOILET 1 DISPOSAL(BREAK ROOM ONLY)ESSENTIAL 35242 102 PL5 ELECTRIC WATER COOLER ELKAY EZSTL8LC GC GC LIGHT GRAY GRANITE WITH CANE SKIRT ------------ \ PL-6- WATER CLOSET-TANK TYPE ZURN Z5560 GC GC ADA COMPLIANT PRESSURE ASSISTED TANK CLIENT PROJECT NO: TYPE PL5 PL7 WATER CLOSET-FLUSH VALVE ZURN Z5655-BWL GC GC ZURN Z5956SS-EL ELONGATED SHELF VESTIBULE LOBBY SUSTAINING WITH STAINLESS STEEL CHECK HINGES, SLOAN 111 ES-S EXPOSED FLUSH _ 1018 101A VALVE 1.6 GPF, ELECTRICAL FLUSH VALVE WITH \ FN1 SLOAN EL-172-A PUSH BUTTON CONTROL, EL-485-A ELECTRONIC BOX AND EL-154 TRANSFORMER O FN1 PL8 LAVATORY-WALL MOUNTED ZURN Z5344 GC GC ZURN Z-7443-FC SINGLE FAUCET CONTROL (LEVER HANDLE. 0.5 GPM. 1-1/4"GRID STRAINER), O FN1 ZURN Z88000R(1/2"x 3/8"CHROME ANGLE SUPPLY WITH STOP), ZURN Z8700(1-1/4"x 1-1/2" s\sAiP-TP WITHRN FN1 FN1 FN1 11-1/44" OFFSET HAND ICAP GR DUDRAIN),TRAP AND SUPPLIES COVERED WITH TRAP WRAP EQUAL TO FN1 FN1 ZURN Z8946-3-NT-TRAP WRAP KIT, ZURN Z-123-1 FN1 LAVATORY CONCEALED ARM CARRIER 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL OA FN1 FN1 FN1 / PL9 !WASHER/DRYER TBD OWNER OWNER STACKING NO. DATE SUBJECT FN1 FN1 ; A REVISION OR ISSUE FN1 FF—N3] j' FIXTURES, FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT SS ArchitnAvenL. FN1 PLAN GENERAL NOTES T.( 4119)255-3830 FN1 / 1. REFER TO SHEET A3.1 FOR TOILET ROOM EQUIPMENT TAGS,TYPICAL FN1 ;' PROJECT NO: 021 -01005-00 w FN1 2 AAFF:ABOVE FINISH FLOOR PROJECT MANAGER: M. ALFIERI FN1 SK13 DESIGNED: T. McMAHON o GC: GENERAL CONTRACTOR % CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER FN1 FN1 FN1 FN1 FN1 FN1 " SS: STAINLESS STEEL DRAWING TITLE: o - FIXTURES, FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT FURNITURE AND - PLAN LEGEND EQUIPMENT PLAN09 Al FURNITURE AND EQUIPMENT PLAN A1.3 SCALE: 1/4"= 1'-0" TYPICAL EXAM ROOM LAYOUT.ALL EXAM ROOMS TO BE SIMILAR OR OPPOSITE HAND. REFER TO EXAM 2 ROOM 101 LL N FOR EQUIPMENT TYPES AND LOCATIONS. DRAWING NO: Q N EQUIPMENT TAG A1 . 3uj REFER TO SHEET A1.3 FOR EQUIPMENT TYPE mo 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 FINISHES FINISHES 00 9soee FINISH ITEM/ MANUFACTURER PRODUCT/SERIES/NAME/COLOR FINISH SUPPLIED INSTALLED COMMENTS FINISH ITEM/ MANUFACTURER PRODUCT/SERIES/NAME/COLOR FINISH SUPPLIED INSTALLED COMMENTS CODE DESCRIPTION BY BY CODE DESCRIPTION BY BY AC1 LAY-IN ARMSTRONG WORLD STYLE: DUNE#1774 WHITE G.C. G.C. PT1 PAINT SHERWIN WILLIAMS COLOR: WESTHIGHLAND WHITE SW7566 EGG-SHELL/ G.C. G.C. FLAT FINISH AT GYPSUM BOARD CEILINGS CEILING INDUSTRIES SIZE: 2' x 2'ANGLED TEGULAR NATIONAL ACCT.#BR71 FLAT SEE (GYP) ONSULTANTS: SYSTEM GRID: 15/16" PRELUDE COMMENTS GYP CEILING GYPSUM BOARD (SEE CEILINGS TO BE PAINTED SHERWIN EGG-SHELL G.C. G.C. AT CEILINGS AND SOFFITS PT2 PAINT SHERWIN WILLIAMS COLOR: ROCKWOOD DARK BROWN EGG-SHELL/ G.C. G.C. SEMI-GLOSS FINISH AT DOOR FRAMES AND C SPECIFICATIONS) WILLIAMS PURE WHITE SW7005. SOFFITS NATIONAL ACCT. #BR71 SW2808 SEMI-GLOSS EXISTING METAL DOORS0. TO BE PAINTED PT1. SEE COMMENTS WB1 6"H PAINTED WOOD BASE (SEE PAINT TO MATCH ADJACENT WALL SEMI- G.C. G.C. LOBBY WALL BASE. PT3 PAINT SHERWIN WILLIAMS COLOR: BALANCED BEIGE SW7037 EGG-SHELL G.C. G.C. WOOD BASE SPECIFICATIONS) COLOR. SHERWIN WILLIAMS NATIONAL GLOSS NATIONAL ACCT. #BR71 ACCT#BR71 VB1 VINYL BASE SHAW CONTRACT 4"H COVE BASE/259DE GREY/580 OWNER G.C. WALL BASE PT4 PAINT SHERWIN WILLIAMS COLOR: HABANERO CHILI SW7589 EGG-SHELL G.C. G.C. NATIONAL ACCT.#BR71 FRP1 FIBERGLASS CRANE COMPOSITES STYLE: GLASBOARD/COLOR WHITE 85 PEBBLED G.C. G.C. LOCATE AT MOP SINK. FRP TO BE INSTALLED HORIZONTALLY AT PT5 PAINT SHERWIN WILLIAMS REINFORCED EMBOSSED 4'-0" H,ABUT TRIM TO ANY ACCESSORIES AND PROVIDE SEALANTNATIONAL ACCT #BR71 COLOR: IRON ORE SW7069 EGG-SHELL G.C. G.C. WOOD CYLINDERS AT NURSES STATION, . C WALL PANEL AT ALL EDGES AND PROVIDE PAINT ABOVE. SEE ELEVATIONS SYSTEM FRP2 FIBERGLASS CRANE COMPOSITES STYLE: GLASBOARD/COLOR WHITE 85 PEBBLED G.C. G.C. LOCATE AT INDICATED RESTROOMS THAT ARE NOT OFF THE FINISH NOTES REINFORCED EMBOSSED LOBBY. FRP TO BE INSTALLED HORIZONTALLY AT 4'-0" H,ABUT WALL PANEL TRIM TO ANY ACCESSORIES AND PROVIDE SEALANT AT ALL 1. THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR PROPER PREPARATION OF ALL NEW AND EXISTING SURFACES IN A SATISFACTORY MANNER TO RECEIVE NEW FINISHES. SYSTEM EDGES AND PROVIDE PAINT ABOVE. THIS INCLUDES THE DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF NECESSARY ITEMS. TOUCH-UP AND/OR REFINISH OF SURFACES DAMAGED BY SUBSEQUENT WORK SHALL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY CT1 PORCELAIN SHAW CONTRACT FOR REFERENCE ONLY AND UNPOLISHED OWNER G C. FLOOR AND WALL/GROUT TO BE OWNER PROVIDED OF THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR. ALL WORK SHALL BE PERFORMED IN CONFORMANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION METHODS. THE GENERAL TILE CARMEN PRESTON COORDINATION WITH G.C. INSTALLATION GC INSTALLED AFC GROUT:AFCGR/BLACK 525. CONTRACTOR SHALL PREPARE THE NEW FLOOR PRIOR TO THE APPLICATION OF FINISH FLOORING. THE NEW CONCRETE SLAB MUST BE SMOOTH AND LEVEL TO WITHIN A TOLERANCE (205)639-6138 LOCATE AT INDICATED RESTROOMS. WHERE FLOOR OF ONE-EIGHTH INCH PER FOOT. carmen.preston(cDshawinc.com STYLE: FAUX CT361 TILES MEETS WALL TILE USE SCHLUTER COVE BASE DILEX-AHK EDGE AND AT ALL EXPOSED TILE EDGES AND TOP OF TILE 2. ALL SURFACES WHICH ARE TO RECEIVE A PAINT FINISH SHALL BE PRIMED AND FINISHED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE WRITTEN SPECIFICATIONS. MINIMUM PAINTING REQUIREMENTS: SIZE: X 24" PROVIDE 1 COAT OF TINTED PRIMER AND A MINIMUM OF TWO COATS OF PAINT SHALL BE APPLIED TO LEVEL FOUR FINISHED GYPSUM BOARD SURFACES IN A PROFESSIONAL MANNER SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY: COLOR: CHARCOAL 550 PROVIDE SCHLUTER E EDGE. FINISH: SATIN ANODIZED ALUMINUM FINISH. WAALLLL TTILILE TO BE INSTALLED TO 5'-0"ABOVE SUCH AS TO PROVIDE A SMOOTH WASHABLE FINISHED SET. FINISHED FLOOR WITH PAINT ABOVE. INSTALL WALL TILE INA 3. THE PAINT CONTRACTOR SHALL REMOVE ALL HARDWARE, SWITCH COVERS ETC. PRIOR TO PAINTING AND BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE REINSTALLATION AFTER PAINTING IS COMPLETED. HORIZONTAL PATTERN. 1?_$D AR 4. UPON COMPLETION OF PAINTING, PROVIDE NOT LESS THAN ONE GALLON OF EACH COLOR OF EACH FINISH USED LABELED WITH FINISH DESIGNATORS INDICATED ON FINISH LEGEND. ���' C'�� PLAM2 PLASTIC FORMICA COLOR: SOLIDS SCULPTED MDF#7812-SP G.C. G.C. PROVIDE AT ALL BASE AND WALL CABINETS. 5. THE INTENT OF THE FINISH SPECIFICATIONS IS TO PROVIDE A SATISFACTORY FINISH TO ALL PARTS OF THE WORK. COVER ALL SURFACES THOROUGHLY. IF THE SPECIFIED NUMBER OF C5~ LOUISE M. l6 LAMINATE COATS DOES NOT ACCOMPLISH THE INTENT, THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE APPLICATION OF ADDITIONAL COATS OF THE SPECIFIED MATERIAL TO GIVE 4W SCHLATTER SATISFACTORY COVERAGE. PLAM3 PLASTIC FORMICA COLOR: CITADEL WARP#5882-58 G.C. G.C. ALL COUNTERTOP AND TRANSACTION COUNTERTOP UNLESS 0TOLEDO, OH LAMINATE NOTED OTHERWISE. 6. FINISH FLOORING INSTALLATION SHALL BE IN THE CONFORMANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED INSTALLATION GUIDELINES. COORDINATE THE INSTALLATION WITH t OTHER TRADES. ARI-11622 0$ Cs , / PLAM4 PLASTIC AFC STANDARD COLOR: CHEMETAL 227 G.C. G.C. NURSES STATION VERTICAL LAMINATE FRONT. 7. ALL JOINTS BETWEEN MATERIALS TO BE TIGHT AND CONSTRUCTED IN A NEAT WORKMANSHIP LIKE MANNER. Fr ^ v LAMINATE PATTERN LINES TO RUN VERTICALLY. ��ai t +� �` 8. ALL FINISHES SHALL BE TOUCHED UP TO CORRECT ANY IMPERFECTIONS AFTER INSTALLATION. FIXTURE CONTRACTOR SHALL PROVIDE TO THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR ALL 09/02/2021 MATERIALS FOR TOUCH-UP WORK. PLAM5 PLASTIC FORMICA COLOR: BLACK 909 G.C. G.C. LAMINATE REVEALS. 9. CLEAN ALL GLASS SURFACES WITH LIQUID DETERGENT AT PROJECT COMPLETION. LAMINATE PROJECT INFORMATION: 10, PROVIDE MINIMUM SIZE 2X4 WOOD BLOCKING AS REQUIRED FOR SUPPORT IN GYPSUM BOARD PARTITIONS. 11. PROVIDE MOP HOLDER WITH SHELF ABOVE MOP SINK QZ1 QUARTZ DORIAN QUARTZ COLOR: STORM GREY G.C. G.C. PROVIDE AT CHECK-IN AND CHECK-OUT TRANSACTION T i GA R D, R COUNTERS. 12. PROVIDE ROBE HOOKS TO BE LOCATED ON THE INSIDE FACE OF ALL DOORS TO EXAM ROOMS, TOILETS,AND PHYSICIAN OFFICE. 13. ALL DOOR AND WINDOW FRAMES TO BE PAINTED PT2. 11 675 SW PACIFIC HWY. LVT1 LUXURY SHAW CONTRACT FOR REFERENCE ONLY AND OWNER G.C. LVT TO BE INSTALLED IN ALL ROOMS UNLESS NOTED VINYL CARMEN PRESTON COORDINATION WITH G.C. INSTALLATION OTHERWISE. 14. ALL WALLS TO BE PAINTED PT1 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. TIGARD, OREGON 97223 FLOORING (205)639-6138 STYLE: AFC WOOD carmen.preston aC)shawinc.com SIZE: 20 MIL, 6"X 48" PLANK 15. GYPSUM BOARD SOFFITS TO BE PAINTED PT1 UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. COLOR: NATURAL 775 16. INSTALL ARCHITECTURAL WINDOW FILM AT GLASS PER ARCHITECTURAL DRAWINGS. SV1 SHEET VINYL SHAW CONTRACT FOR REFERENCE ONLY AND OWNER G.C. AFC WELD/257DE/WEL 5204. REFER TO SPECIFICATION FOR 17. AT FLOORING MATERIAL CHANGE AT VESTIBULE 100A AND LOBBY 101 PROVIDE FEATHERED CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT SO THAT THERE IS A SMOOTH, LEVEL TRANSITION BETWEEN FLOORING CARMEN PRESTON COORDINATION WITH G.C. INSTALLATION OWNER PROVIDED AND G.C. PROVIDED PRODUCT STANDARDS. FLOORING MATERIALS, NO TRANSITION STRIP NEEDED AT THIS LOCATION. B (205)639-6138 STYLE:AFC SHEET 4002V INTEGRAL COVE BASE TO BE 6" H SEE SPECIFICATIONS. carmen.preston(a)shawinc.com COLOR: SLATE 73518 205-638-6138 WCPT WALK-OFF SHAW CONTRACT STYLE: WELCOME II TILE 5T031 G.C. G.C. CARPET TILE CARMEN PRESTON COLOR: BLACK CHOCOLATE 31751 (205)639-6138 carmen.preston(a)s hawi nc.com 205-638-6138 CLIENT INFORMATION* CC2 CUBICAL IN PRO CORP. /CLICKEZE STYLE: BRUSHSTROKE G.C. G.C. PROVIDE WITH FORMATRAC BENDABLE TRACK. CURTAIN FABRIC CURTAIN COLOR: DWELL TO BE ORIENTED VERTICALLY, BOTTOM OF CURTAIN TO BE 6"AFF. MESH: SNOW STANDARD FABRIC HEIGHT TO BE 66"WITH A CUBICAL CURTAIN MESH AT TOP TO MEET THE FIRE CODE. MESH LENGTH TO VARY O BASED ON CEILING HEIGHT AND CUBICLE CURTAIN CARRIER. PROVIDE CURTAIN AT PROCEDURE ROOM. RAIL1 CHAIR RAIL IN PRO CORP. STYLE: 1600, COLOR: SHARKSKIN 0350 G.C. G.C. PROVIDE AT EXAM ROOMS (MOUNTED AT 34"ABOVE FINISH FLOOR TO TOP OF RAIL) AMERICAN FAMILY CG1 CORNER IN PRO CORP. STYLE: 2 1/2" CLEAR POLYCARBONATE G.C. G.C. INSTALL CORNER GUARDS AND END GUARDS AT ALL OUTSIDE CARE GUARD CORNER GUARDS CORNERS AND WALL ENDS. CORK CORK KOROSEAL STYLE: TAC-WALL/COLOR: #66 SUNTAN G.C. G.C. STANDARD 1/4"CORK SURFACE AT ALL AREAS SHOWN ON 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD SURFACE WALLTALKERS WITH TRIM ELEVATIONS. BIRMINGHAM, AL TS1 TRANSITION SHAW CONTRACT COLOR: TO MATCH VB1 OWNER G.C. 35242 STRIP TS2 TRANSITION SCHLUTER SYSTEMS STYLE: RENO-U/COLOR: EB- G.C. G.C. CLIENT PROJECT NO: STRIP BRUSHED STAINLESS STEEL TYPE 304 SHADE2 SHADE TELESHADE STYLE: MANUAL SINGLE SHADES WITH G.C. G.C. PROVIDE AT LOBBY STOREFRONT WINDOWS. SYSTEM SOLARPOLY COMFORT 3% OPEN SHADE CLOTH (IC03)COLOR: P28 OYSTER/CHARCOAL 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL NO. DATE I SUBJECT A A REVISION OR ISSUE SSOE Architects, L.L.C. 1001 Madison Avenue Toledo, OH 43604 T. (419)255-3830 PROJECT NO: 021 -01005-00 Lu PROJECT MANAGER: M. ALFIERI DESIGNED: T. McMAHON o CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER 0 0 DRAWING TITLE: o FINISH LEGEND a < � o m Uo �N DRAWING NO: Q c� 0 61 A1 .4 � Q mo 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 oossoe° PT3 RAIL1 PT3 RAIL1 PT3 RAIL1 CONSULTANTS: OB/GYN EXAM 5 EXAM 4 EXAM 3 EXAM 6 111 112 113 114 M �_ LVT1 LVT1 J J LVT1 LVT1 a VB1 VB1 VB1 qQ VB1 PT1 PT1 PTI PT1 RAIL1 C C CORRIDOR C 104 LVT VB1 PT1 TS1 PT4 RAIL1 SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY PATIENT TOILET NURSE PROCEDURE 110 STATION sv, 109 �vT1 FRP2 PT1 B LVT1 VB1 �y~� LOUISE M. PT1 \ PTI xW SCHLATTER y PT3 U TOLEDO, OH J'T ARI-11622 p� UTILITYr GAn 108 — — — LAB/ \ /dcF .C.U� LVT1 CORRIDOR J 09/02/2021 VBI C103 PT1 �— LVT INSTALL DIRECTION — CBT PROJECT INFORMATION: X-RAY VIEWING ARE116B TIGARD, OR PT3 IRAILl =777P B1 I 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. PHYSICIANS PT, I OFFICE TIGARD, OREGON 97223 107 r BREAK LVT1 J7_F_�_ EXAM 1 COCR0IDOR XRAY a ROOM VB1 105 — 104C LVTBi EXAM 2 LVT1 LVTl VB1 Tl JF — T — _F — — ,L PT1 LVT1 BT V 106= PT1 VB1 P B PT1 VB1 PT1 PT1 B PT4 a PT3 RAIL1 ADMIN PT4 104A TRIAGE 1 CLIENT INFORMATION: LVT1 103A / VB1 LVT, V61 O PTI PT1 MANAGER CHECK-OUT / 104B C101 LVT1 LVT1 PB, PB; TESTING AMERICAN FAMILY / ss CARE — SSB jy SVP FRP2 PT1 ' ' 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD j J 4PT2 PT2 ATd TOILET qTd Q ' BIRMINGHAM, AL 102 5 CT1 % CT1 PT1 CLIENT PROJECT NO: VESTIBULE / 101B WCPT VB1LVT INSTALL DIRECTION i PT1 / LOBBY 101A LVT1 WB1 PT1 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL NO. DATE SUBJECT A / A REVISION OR ISSUE 1001 SSOE Architects, L.L.C. T. (419)x255-3 30 dison nue Toledo, OH 43604 I PROJECT NO: 021 -01005-00 w PROJECT MANAGER: M. ALFIERI FINISH TAG LEGEND DESIGNED: T. McMAHON CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER o ROOM NAME DRAWING TITLE: o FINISH PLAN 101 ROOM NUMBER a rn — -- N FLOOR FINISH o 0 Al FINISH PLAN 1 BASE FINISH F WALL FINISH N A1.5 SCALE: 1/4"= T-0" LL C N DRAWING NO: ¢ �v SPECIFIC COMMENT/ o FINISHA 1 . 5 umi � Q m0 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE # DESCRIPTION MOUNTING HEIGHT COUNT Al CUSTOM AFC VINYL GRAPHIC (PREP FOR APPLIED SEE ELSURFACE) EVATION A6.2 1 o0oo 9soe, A2 PRIVACY POLICY GRAPHIC 50"TOP OF FRAME 1 E E:l A3 _A3 A3 ART(TO BE DETERMINED, 36"X 24" HORIZONTAL)-BY 66"TO CENTER OF FRAME 5 FF APPROVED VENDOR A A4 ART(TO BE DETERMINED, 24"X 36"VERTICAL)-BY 66"TO CENTER OF FRAME I CONSULTANTS: 1 APPROVED VENDOR.A18 X-RAY DOOR- BY APPROVED X-RAY VENDOR 52.5"ABOVE FINISH FLOOR 1 r A19 IX-RAY DOOR-BY APPROVED X-RAY VENDOR 60"ABOVE FINISH FLOOR I OB/GYN EXAM. A20 X-RAY DOOR- BY APPROVED X-RAY VENDOR 67.5"ABOVE FINISH FLOOR I 6 EXAM 5 EXAM 4 F_ S17 WALL SIGN EXAM ROOM I -BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 111 EXAM 3 11-2 S18 WALL SIGN EXAM ROOM 2-BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 S19 WALL SIGN EXAM ROOM 3-BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 S20 WALL SIGN EXAM ROOM 4-BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 S21 WALL SIGN EXAM ROOM 5-BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 S22 WALL SIGN EXAM ROOM 6-BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 S27 WALL SIGN TRIAGE-BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 C _T S31 WALL SIGN EMPLOYEES ONLY- BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 S21 S20 S19 S32 WALL SIGN X-RAY-BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 C S33 WALL SIGN RESTROOM-BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 S35 WALL SIGN MANAGER-BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 CORRIDOR S36 WALL SIGN BREAK ROOM-BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 S37 WALL SIGN PROCEDURE ROOM- BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 S41] S38 WALL SIGN LAB-BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 I S40 WALL SIGN DRUG SCREENS ONLY-BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 S41 WALL SIGN PATIENT RESTROOM- BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 p S42 WALL SIGN OFFICE-BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 S47 WALL SIGN UTILITY- BY APPROVED VENDOR 50"TO CENTER 1 SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY: S70 TENT SIGN PLEASE SIGN-IN- BY APPROVED VENDOR 1 PATIENT i S37 S71 TENT SIGN CHECK-OUT-BY APPROVED VENDOR 1 TOILET 110 SIGNAGE GENERAL NOTES: III ��SD Aj?e NURSE 1. ALL SIGNS AND GRAPHICS INSTALLED BY THE GENERAL CONTRACTOR UNLESS NOTED STATION C:) PROCEDURE OTHERWISE. N LOUISE M. W SCHIAITER 4 2. ART VENDOR INFORMATION: COMPANY: PUBLIC IMAGERY • TOLEDO OH ---—-------- CONTACT: DEBORAH TROY-PROJECT MANAGER EMAIL dtroy@publicimagery.com ARI-11622 I L-J 3. OWNER TO PROVIDE ROOM SIGNAGE AT ALL DOOR LOCATIONS AND MEET ALL APPLICABLE .... ....... S4ACCESSIBILITY STANDARDS. SIGNS ARE TO BE 7.25"X 7.25"AND EQUAL TO APCE SIGNS. 47 BACKGROUND COLOR TO BE EQUAL TO A44 ARCHITECTURAL BROWN BY APCO SIGNS WITH 71. LAB/ WHITE LETTERS. FONT SHOULD BE ARIAL. BRAILLE IS TO BE PROVIDED. SUBMIT SAMPLE AND 09/02/2021 PROOF OF ALL SIGNS FOR APPROVAL BEFORE PRODUCTION. SIGNS ARE TO BE MOUNTED AT A CORRIDOR HEIGHT TO ALLOW THE BASELINES OF RAISED CHARACTERS TO BE LOCATED BETWEEN 481,AND S42 C103 60"ABOVE FINISH FLOOR. PROJECT INFORMATION 17 UTILITY TILI X-RAY T VIEWING AREA TIGARD, OR 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. PHYSICIANS TIGARD, OREGON 97223 OFFICE CORRIDOR BREAK ROOM 107 S18 C102 FS-321 A F i X-RAY EXAM I EXAM 2 MOUNT ON EXTERIOR 01 J SIDE OF DOOR -<ttAl9jj B ...... -1 AZO B S27 CLIENT INFORMATION: 11 S361 ADMIN S31 TRIAGE 1 104A 103A O CHECK-OUT MANAGER FS 375 S40 1048 < TESTING AMERICAN FAMILY CARE 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD 0 BIRMINGHAM, AL TOILET I CP 35242 JjCLIENT PROJECT NO VESTIBULE S33 LOBBY F—Al I NO. DATE SUBJECT A A REVISION OR ISSUE SSOE Architects, L.L.C. 1001 Madison Avenue Toled OH 43604 Yi T. (419)255-3830 0 C5 PROJECT NO: 021 -01005-00 a- uj PROJECT MANAGER: M. ALFIERI DESIGNED- T. McMAHON CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER DRAWING TITLE: L SIGNAGE PLAN AND ---------- IN 0 -2 I/ Al SIGNAGE SIGNAGE PLAN LEGENDo '\A1.6 SCALE: 1/4"= 1'-13" LL DRAWING NO: uj A1 .6 mo 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 WINDOW ELEVATIONS DOOR TYPES 4" 3,000 PSI CONCRETE SLAB WITH EXAM ROOM DOOR: g 2,4„ BREAK ROOM DOOR: O O ssoeo 6X6-W1.4XW1.4 W.W.F. OVER 8 MIL LEADED GLASS IN LEAD PAINTED HOLLOW METAL VAPOR BARRIER OVER 4"CRUSHED LINED HOLLOW METAL FRAME WITH DUAL 1/4" ONE 3'-0"X 7'-0"X 1 3/4" T-0"X T-0"X 1 3/4" STONE FRAME TO COMPLY WITH WAY TEMPERED GLASS / SOLID CORE WOOD, PLAIN SLICED WHITE BIRCH, PREFINISHED SOLID CORE WOOD, PLAIN SLICED WHITE BIRCH, PREFINISHED PHYSICISTS REPORT, 3 HINGES 3 HINGES #5 DOWELS 24" LONG MINIMUM AT 24" DIMENSIONS ARE CLEAR / 3 SILENCERS / 3 SILENCERS ON CENTER HORIZONTAL. CAST IN EXCLUSIVE OF STOPS / 1 WALL MOUNTED DOOR STOP iv 1 WALL MOUNTED DOOR STOP CONSULTANTS: PLACE INTO NEW FLOOR SLAB, o 1 LEVER TYPE DOOR HANDLE WITH CYLINDRICAL PASSAGE SET(ACCESSIBLE o { ONE WAY 1/4"TEMPERED GLASS AND WOOD STOPS IN DOOR TYPICAL COMPLIANT) HAGER COMPANY 3500 SERIES LEVER HANDLE AUGUST STYLE 1 LEVER TYPE DOOR HANDLE WITH CYLINDRICAL PASSAGE SET(ACCESSIBLE io o \ STAINLESS STEEL FINISH FUNCTION NUMBER 10 ANSI NO F75. LATCHBOLT M \ COMPLIANT) HAGER COMPANY 3500 SERIES LEVER HANDLE AUGUST STYLE EXISTING ❑ v OPERATED BY LEVER FROM EITHER SIDE AT ALL TIMES 0 STAINLESS STEEL FINISH FUNCTION NUMBER 10 ANSI NO F75. LATCHBOLT CONCRETE SLAB1 0, \ KNOCK-DOWN HOLLOW METAL FRAMES \ OPERATED BY LEVER FROM EITHER SIDE AT ALL TIMES O \ \ KNOCK-DOWN HOLLOW METAL FRAMES ° OAF a a � " A-XXX J-iXXX ,• , e a ° PHYSICIANS OFFICE DOOR: TESTING DOOR: III III-III=III T-0"X 7'-0"X 1 3/4" T-0"X 7'-0"X 1 3/4" C 1'-0"MINIMUM / SOLID CORE WOOD, PLAIN SLICED WHITE BIRCH, PREFINISHED SOLID CORE WOOD, PLAIN SLICED WHITE BIRCH, PREFINISHED C 3 HINGES POCKET DOOR PROVIDE VAPOR BARRIER / 3 SILENCERS HAGER 9631 POCKET DOOR TRACK AND INSTALLATION KIT(WITH 9634 OPTION) BELOW SLAB.ADHERE T / 1 WALL MOUNTED DOOR STOP HEAVY DUTY COMMERCIAL DOOR FRAME(125 POUNDS PLUS) EXISTING BARRIER PRIORR TO o 1 LEVER TYPE DOOR HANDLE WITH CYLINDRICAL LOCK SET(ACCESSIBLE o TRICYCLE HANGERS AND JUMPPROOF TRACK STIFFENERS POURING NEW SLAB. r` COMPLIANT) HAGER COMPANY 3500 SERIES LEVER HANDLE AUGUST STYLE F— SELF ADJUSTING FLOOR ANCHORS AND STOPS \ STAINLESS STEEL FINISH FUNCTION NUMBER 50 ANSI NO F82. PUSH BUTTON ADJUST FRAMING TO ACCOMMODATE POCKET DOOR LOCKING OUTSIDE LEVER POCKET DOOR CANNOT RECESS FULLY INTO FRAME IN ORDER TO MEET C2 SLAB CONNECTION DETAIL \ KNOCK-DOWN HOLLOW METAL FRAMES ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS \ DOOR FACE SHALL HAVE RECESSED CUPS THAT ALLOW THE DOOR TO BE TYP. SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" OPERATED WITHOUT GRASPING 3'-0" T-0" PROVIDE ACCURATE 2001 ADAP SLIDING DOOR HARDWARE SET. SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY: FINISH FLOOR LEVEL B-XXX K-XXX EXISTING DOOR METAL THRESHOLD TOILET ROOM DOOR: EXIT DOOR: OD Ake / T-0"X 7'-0"X 1 3/4" / 3'-0"X 7'-0"X 1 3/4" LOUISE M. f� / SOLID CORE WOOD, PLAIN SLICED WHITE BIRCH, PREFINISHED / HOLLOW METAL DOOR PAINTED C� 2 / 3 HINGES / 3 HINGES �W SCHLATTER 1 0 3 GASKETING SILENCERS b 3 SILENCERS 1 SELF CLOSER FLOOR MOUNTED DOOR STOP TOLEDO, OH \ 1 FLOOR MOUNTED DOOR STOP \ 1 LEVER TYPE DOOR HANDLE WITH CYLINDRICAL ENTRY LOCKSET(ACCESSIBLE STAINLESS STEEL KICK PLATE COMPLIANT) HAGER COMPANY 3500 SERIES LEVER HANDLE AUGUST STYLE SS ARI-11622 O \ 1 LEVER TYPE DOOR HANDLE WITH CYLINDRICAL LOCK SET(ACCESSIBLE \ FINISH. LATCHBOLT OPERATED BY LEVER FROM INSIDE AT ALL TIMES \ COMPLIANT) HAGER COMPANY 3500 SERIES LEVER HANDLE AUGUST STYLE \ KNOCK-DOWN OR WELDED HOLLOW METAL FRAMES STAINLESS STEEL FINISH FUNCTION NUMBER 40 ANSI NO F76A. LATCHBOLT GASKETING 3'-0" OPERATED BY LEVER FROM EITHER SIDE. OUTSIDE LEVER IS LOCKED BY PUSH 3, 0„ DRIP EDGE 09102/2021 BUTTON AND UNLOCKED BY EMERGENCY RELEASE OUTSIDE, OPERATING INSIDE DOOR VIEWER C_ LEVER OR CLOSING DOOR L DOOR SWEEP KNOCK-DOWN HOLLOW METAL FRAMES THRESHOLD r, ADA THRESHOLD DETAIL PROJECT INFORMATION TYP. SCALE: 3" _ ,'-0" / / CLOSET DOOR: / / ELECTRICAL ROOM DOOR: T-0"X T-0"X 13/4„ / T-0"X 7'-0"X 13/4" T I GAR D O R o SOLID CORE WOOD, PLAIN SLICED WHITE BIRCH, PREFINISHED b HOLLOW METAL DOOR PAINTED 1 5/8"GYPSUM BOARD ON 3 HINGES 3 5/8" METAL STUD \ 3 SILENCERS \ 3 SIL NCERS 11675 SW PACIFIC H WY. FRAMING \ 1 WALL MOUNTED DOOR STOP FLOOR MOUNTED DOOR STOP 1 LEVER TYPE DOOR HANDLE\ COMPLIANT) HAGER COMPANY 3L5 0 SERIES EVER ANDLEAUGUSTTH CYLINDRICAL LOCK SET IBLESTYLE \ 1 LEVER TYPE DOOR HANDLE\ COMPLIANT) HAGERCOMPANVITH CYLINDRICAL STORAGE SET 35 0 SERIES EVER ADLEAUGUSTSTY ELTIGARD, OREGON 97223 SS STAINLESS STEEL FINISH. LATCHBOLT OPERATED BY LEVER FROM INSIDE OR BY FINISH. LATCHBOLT OPERATED BY LEVER FROM INSIDE AT ALL TIMES 3'-0" KEY FROM OUTSIDE. 3,_0„ I- KNOCK-DOWN HOLLOW METAL FRAMES KNOCK-DOWN HOLLOW METAL FRAMES ---------- F D-XXX M-XXX 5/8"GYPSUM BOARD B ON 3 5/8" METAL U T WIDTH- REFER TO DOOR TYPE SCHED E X-RAY DOOR: FRONT ENTRY STOREFRONT DOOR: STUD FRAMING / T-6"X T-0"X 1 3/4" / T-0"X 7'-0"X 1 3/4" B / SOLID CORE WOOD, PLAIN SLICED WHITE BIRCH, LEAD CORE, PREFINISHED / CLEAR ANODIZED ALUMINUM STOREFRONT DOOR / 2 PIVOT HINGES / MEDIUM STYLE • 4 SILENCERS EXTRUDED ALUMINUM GLAZING STOPS AND PREFORMED GASKETS `' ^ LEAD LINED, HOLLOW METAL FRAME. DOOR EQUIVALENT 3 OFFSET PIVOTS r \ SHIELDING PER PHYSICIST REPORT \ 1 CLOSER \ GASKETING F STRIKE \ 1 CYLINDER GUARD HUMB TURN 1 CYLINDER WITH CLIENT INFORMATION: 5/8" GYPSUM BOARD ON \ 1 LEVER TYPE DOOR HANDLE WITH CYLINDRICAL PASSAGE SET(ACCESSIBLE 1 PULL HANDLE 3 19 5/8" METAL STUD COMPLIANT) HAGER COMPANY 3500 SERIES LEVER HANDLE AUGUST STYLE 11 1 PUSH BAR FRAMING STAINLESS STEEL FINISH FUNCTION NUMBER 10 ANSI NO F75. LATCHBOLT 1 THRESHOLD 3'-6" OPERATED BY LEVER FROM EITHER SIDE AT ALL TIMES 3'_0„ 1 DOOR SWEEP E JAMB DETAIL HEAD + SILL E XXX WELDED HOLLOW METAL FRAMES N XXX GASKETING CORRIDOR DOOR: EXISTING ENTRY DOOR: DETAIL T-0"X T-0"X 1 3/4" GENERAL CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY EXISTING CONDITION AND HARDWARE. REPAIR / SOLID CORE WOOD, PLAIN SLICED WHITE BIRCH, PREFINISHED OR REPLACE TO ENSURE THE FOLLOWING: AMERICAN FAMILY ICU DOOR HEAD/JAMB DETAILS / 3HINGES EXISTING DOOR HARDWARE TO LIKENEWCONDITIONENTRY LOCKSET. B, / 3 SILENCERS REPLACE NEEDED FOR MECHANISM AND FINISH. CARE • 1 SELF CLOSER ACCESSIBLELE COMPLIANT PUSH PULL HARDWARE. A2.1 SCALE: 1 1/2"= 1'-0" CAP 9 1 WALL MOUNTED DOOR STOP EX THERE SHALL BE NO SPECIAL KNOWLEDGE REQUIRED TO OPEN AN EXIT DOOR \ STAINLESS STEEL KICK PLATE FROM INSIDE THE SPACE. 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD 1 LEVER TYPE DOOR HANDLE WITH CYLINDRICAL PASSAGE SET(ACCESSIBLE EXIT DOORS TO REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING ALL OPERATING HOURS. \ COMPLIANT) HAGER COMPANY 3500 SERIES LEVER HANDLE AUGUST STYLE SIGN SHALL BE POSTED ON EGRESS SIDE OF DOOR STATING: "THIS DOOR TO BIRMINGHAM, AL \ STAINLESS STEEL FINISH FUNCTION NUMBER 10 ANSI NO F75. LATCHBOLT REMAIN UNLOCKED DURING OCCUPANCY." SIGN TO HAVE 1 INCH LETTERS ON OPERATED BY LEVER FROM EITHER SIDE AT ALL TIMES CONTRASTING BACKGROUND. 35242 KNOCK-DOWN HOLLOW METAL FRAMES ALL EXISTING EXTERIOR EXIT DOORS SHALL OPEN OUTWARD, BE SELF CLOSING T-0" AND FIT TIGHTLY. MANUALLY OPERATED FLUSH BOLTS OR SURFACE BOLTS ARE NOT PERMITTED. CLIENT PROJECT NO: F AUTOMATIC FLUSH BOLTS ARE PERMITTED. 6"CHAIR RAIL VERIFY ACCESSIBLE THRESHOLD IN ACCORDANCE WITH IBC 1008.1.7 AND DOOR MANAGER OFFICE DOOR: HARDWARE IN ACCORDANCE WITH UL10C AND UL305. 6 2.0 T-0"X 7'-0"X 1 3/4" SLIDE/SWING SWINGOUT FIBERGLASS SOLID CORE WOOD, PLAIN SLICED WHITE BIRCH, PREFINISHED PANEL SIDELITE PROCEDURE DOOR: REINFORCED - 3 HINGES PANEL (FRP) / 3 SILENCERS 9'-0"X T-2 1/2"X 4" / 1 WALL MOUNTED DOOR STOP \ ICU MANUAL SLIDE DOOR iv ONE WAY 1/4"TEMPERED GLASS AND WOOD STOPS IN DOOR \ CLEAR ANODIZED FINISH 1 LEVER TYPE DOOR HANDLE WITH CYLINDRICAL PRIVACY SET(ACCESSIBLE MANUAL SLIDE DOOR WITH BREAKAWAY OPTION o COMPLIANT) HAGER COMPANY 3500 SERIES LEVER HANDLE AUGUST STYLE M HORTON PROFILER-ICU TYPE 310 SINGLE SLIDE v 2 STAINLESS STEEL FINISH FUNCTION NUMBER 50 ANSI NO F82. PUSH BUTTON ELEVATION SHOWN FROM CORRIDOR \ LOCKING OUTSIDE LEVER \ KNOCK-DOWN HOLLOW METAL FRAMES i 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL 0Ilk 5k A N G XXX 9 0 DATE SUBJECT RE A REVISION OR ISSUE T-0" ADMIN DOOR: P XXX SSOE Architects, L.L.C. 6" 1001 Madison Avenue T-O"X7'-o"X13/4" DOOR AND HARDWARE NOTES T. (4d19)02 53830 ab SOLID CORE WOOD, PLAIN SLICED WHITE BIRCH, PREFINISHED 3 HINGES CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY ALL WALL OPENINGS PRIOR TO FABRICATION OF DOORS AND FRAMES. o / 3 SILENCERS PROJECT NO: 021 -01005-00 a 1 SELF CLOSER w N LOCK AND KEY(S)TO BE PROVIDED FOR ALL DOORS ON/ OFFICES, RX CLOSETS, AND STORAGE ROOMS. KEY SHALL BE 1 WALL MOUNTED DOOR STOP PROJECT MANAGER: M.ALFIERI < q ONE WAY 1/4"TEMPERED GLASS AND WOOD STOPS IN DOOR UNIQUE PER LOCK AND NOT REPRODUCIBLE WITHOUT SIGNATURE AUTHORIZATION. KEYMARK OR EQUAL. PROVIDE 5 DESIGNED: T. McMAHON 1 LEVER TYPE DOOR HANDLE WITH CYLINDRICAL PRIVACY SET ACCESSIBLE LABELED AND NUMBERED KEYS FOR EACH LOCK UPON COMPLETION o ( CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER n Z \ COMPLIANT) HAGER COMPANY 3500 SERIES LEVER HANDLE AUGUST STYLE KEYING: n r STAINLESS STEEL FINISH FUNCTION NUMBER 50 ANSI NO\ F82. PUSH BUTTON 5 COPIES OF EACH DRAWING TITLE: o LOCKING OUTSIDE LEVER N BASE REFER TO BASE REFER TO \ KNOCK-DOWN HOLLOW METAL FRAMES UNIQUE PER LOCK DOOR AND WINDOW a FINISH SCHEDULE FINISH SCHEDULE STAMPED 'DO NOT DUPLICATE' a h PROVIDE MASTER KEYS ELEVATIONS AND ° o FIBERGLASS REINFORCED " xxx ALL DOORS TO HAVE KNOCK DOWN HOLLOW METAL FRAMES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE, THE BOTTOM 10 INCHES OF ALL DETAILS A, A2 PANEL SECTION DOORS SHALL HAVE A SMOOTH, UNINTERRUPTED SURFACE PER ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS. c� lL N CHAIR RAIL SECTION A2.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A2.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = ,'-0" ALL DOOR HARDWARE TO BE ADA COMPLIANT. DRAWING NO: o m A2. 1 � Q mo 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 GENERAL NOTES 1. REFER TO SHEET A1.3 FOR TOILET ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE O 0 ssoe0 2. REFER TO SHEET A1.1 FOR PARTITION TYPES 3. REFER TO SHEET A1.4 FOR FINISH SCHEDULE 4. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR RECEPTACLE PLACEMENT CONSULTANTS 5. REFER TO SHEET A7.1 FOR EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORY MOUNTING HEIGHTS 6. REFER TO SHEET A1.1 FOR GENERAL CONSTRUCTION NOTES, PLAN NOTES AND FLOOR PLAN LEGEND C C SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY. 5e SOD ARC'S? LOUISE M. W SCHLATTER n • TOLEDO, OH ARI-11622 0� S! RF�°c4h der 09/02/2021 DOOR MANUEVERING PROJECT INFORMATION: CLEARANCE - FORWARD APPROACH RADIUS DIAMETER ADA TURNING - _ _ _ _ _ T I GA R D , OR 30"x 48"CLEAR FLOOR SPACE 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. BEYOND ARCH CLEAR FDOTLS TIGARD, OREGON 97223 60"X 56" CLEAR FLOORRS SPACE :( PATIENT TL18 TOILET B TL42 30"x 48"ADA CLEAR APPROACH B FOR LAVATORY i TL1 i CLIENT INFORMATION. A 11 111 PL6 1' 3° z TL36 O SKS B3 ENLARGED TOILET PLAN (110) AMERICAN FAMILY A1.1 SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" NOTE: CARE 1. REFER TO A4/A7.1 FOR LAVATORY AND RELATED ACCESSORIES INSTALL 2. REFER TO A3/A7.1 FOR TOILET AND RELATED ACCESSORIES INSTALL 3700 CAHABA B EACH RD 60"X 56" CLEAR FLOOR SPACE 60" DIAMETER ADA TURNING RADIUS TL7 BIRMINGHAM, AL 30"x 48"CLEAR FLOOR SPACE T(42 35242 BEYOND ARCH OF DOOR TL6 TL18 PL6 CLIENT PROJECT NO. 60"X 56"CLEAR TL36 FLOOR SPACE Oa �_ PLS O j DOOR MANUEVERING TL42 "T-SHAPE"ADA CLEARANCE - - - - - - - - TL6 TURNING FORWARD APPROACH t _ _ _._ -TOILET 1 r TESTING CLEARANCE 102 i i TL18 1038 60"X 56" CLEAR SK1FLOOR SPACE 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL A _ _ _ NO DATE SUBJECT A REVISION OR ISSUE P SSOE Architects. L.L.C. 1001 Madison Avenue Toledo. OH 43604 TL3 TL36 T. (419) 255-3830 30" x 48"ADA CLEAR APP � FOR CHANGING STATIONROACH TL1 PL7 021 -01005-00 TL5 PROJECT NO: Lu 30" x 48"ADA CLEAR APPROACH TL9 pLg PROJECT MANAGER: M.ALFIERI Q FOR LAVATORY TL8 DESIGNED T. McMAHON o CHECKED L. SCHLATTER 0 0 DRAWING TITLE o A3 ENLARGED TOILET AND TESTING PLAN (102 AND 103B) DETAILED TOILET as A1.1 SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" NOTE: ROOMS O o u' T. REFER TO A4/A7.1 FOR LAVATORY AND RELATED ACCESSORIES INSTALL. o 2. REFER TO A3/A7.1 FOR TOILET AND RELATED ACCESSORIES INSTALL. rn� NOTE. 1. REFER TO C1/A7.1 FOR TESTING TOILET AND RELATED ACCESSORIES INSTALL U o DRAWING NO Q N A3. 1uj M Q m 0 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 oossoe° 5/8"GYPSUM BOARD - HOLD TIGHT TO g, Al EXISTING COLUMN CONSULTANTS: EXISTING COLUMN B1 5/8"GYPSUM BOARD - HOLD 61 TIGHT TO EXISTING COLUMN fBlF' C C EXISTING COLUMN Al B1 B1 SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY: c3 COLUMN ENCLOSURE DETAIL c4 COLUMN ENCLOSURE DETAIL A1.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A1.1 SCALE: 1 1/2" = ,'-0" �,R D ARC �r LOUISE M. �W SCHLATTER y EXISTING COLUMN • TOLEDO,OH 61 5/8"GYPSUM Al B1 HOLD TIGHT GYPSUMTO ARD- 61 � -11622 FEXISTING COLUMN !!l111 VERIFY IN FIELD 5/8"GYPSUM BOARD - /BOJ/O2/2021 HOLD TIGHT TO EXISTING COLUMN 81 PROJECT INFORMATION: EXISTING COLUMN B, TIGARD, OR Ho GYPSU 7BOARD 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. TIGARD, OREGON 97223 EXISTING CO EXISTING COLUMN 62 COLUMN ENCLOSURE DETAIL 63 COLUMN ENCLOSURE DETAIL 64 COLUMN ENCLOSURE DETAIL A1.1 SCALE: 11/2"= 1'-0" A1.1 SCALE: 11/2"= ,'-0" A1.1 SCALE: 11/2" = 1'-0" B B CLIENT INFORMATION: EXISTING WALL CONSTRUCTION TO O REMAIN � I I EXISTING STOREFRONT HEIGHT (1h AMERICAN FAMILY 10'-0"VERIFY INFIELD , PLASTIC LAMINATE CONTINUOUS SEALANT ' CEILING HEIGHT CARE (PL3 REFER TO FINISH REFER TO A1.2 SCHEDULE)ON11/4" PROVIDE SILICONE GASKET AT 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD PARTICLE BOARD SILL GLAZING FOR TIGHT SEAL BIRMINGHAM, AL 35242 — — — INSTALL SOLAR GARD INSTALL SOLAR GARD TRUEVUE 5 ON ALL INTERIOR ; TRUEVUE 5 ON ALL CLIENT PROJECT NO: SURFACES OF EXISTING INTERIOR SURFACES OF STOREFRONT SYSTEM. REFER ; EXISTING STOREFRONT i TO GENERAL CONSTRUCTION i SYSTEM. REFER TO NOTE#15. -ONLY AT LOCATION GENERAL CONSTRUCTION BEHIND FRAMING NOTE#15. REFER TO I ' PARTITION TYP 3 5/8" METAL FRAMING I , REFER TO ' , ' PARTITION TYP I ; 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL NO. DATE I SUBJECT A A REVISION OR ISSUE SSOE Architects, L.L.C. 1001 Madison Avenue EXISTING STOREFRONT EXISTING STOREFRONT T. (419)025543830 SYSTEM TO REMAIN. LOCK AND SYSTEM TO REMAIN. LOCK AND SEAL ALL EXTERIOR DOORS. SEAL ALL EXTERIOR DOORS. PROJECT NO: 021 -01005-00 a REMOVE ALL INTERIOR DOOR REMOVE ALL INTERIOR DOOR w HARDWARE AND TURN OVER HARDWARE AND TURN OVER PROJECT MANAGER: M. ALFIERI TO OWNER-TYPICAL TO OWNER-TYPICAL DESIGNED: T. MCMAHON o CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER voi 0 A3 STOREFRONT WALL DETAIL A4 STOREFRONT WALL DETAIL DRAWING TITLE: o A4.1 SCALE: 11/2" = 1'-0" A4.1 SCALE: 11/2" = ,'-0" WALL SECTIONS a < 077 � o rn� H � Uo LL N DRAWING NO: 60) Q N A4. 1 Imo ili � Q mo 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 POWER AND DATA- REFER TO A1.6 FOR ART CASEWORK NOTES REFER TO ELECTRICAL SELECTION AT EACH EXAM ROOM SK13 1. CASEWORK DESIGNATIONS: B 01 - 24 O O ssoeo CASEWORK CATEGORY EQ EQ B = BASE CABINET D= DRAWER / S = SINK BASE CABINET SK4 / W=WALL CABINET CONSULTANTS: / SK2 1 _ -.1 CABINET STYLE-REFER TO PL1 / L SHEETS A6.1 AND A6.2 SK1 � / O TL2 SK3 Al WIDTH (IN INCHES) COUNTERTOP AND / TL8 A2.1 BACKSPLASH 3 b 2'-6" RAIL1 `Q 2. ALL BASE CABINET DEPTHS ARE TO BE 24"AND ALL WALL k-A hi Pe Irl \ io '" CABINET DEPTHS ARE TO BE 14" INCHES UNLESS NOTED F OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS FILLER PANEL q \ b \ b 3. MATERIALS: BASE- REFER TO i \ UPPER CABINETS- PLAM2 C FINISH SCHEDULE _ N \ LOWER CABINETS- PLAM2 \ COUNTERTOPS AND TRANSACTION COUNTERS- PLAM3 C FINISHED END BASE-REFER TO NURSES STATION FRONT VERTICAL LAMINATE - PLAM4 PANEL-TYPICAL AT B05-16 SO4-21 2'-0" WORK STATION BASE-REFER TO BASE - REFER TO NURSES STATION LAMINATE REVEALS- PLAM5 ALL EXPOSED SIDES BRACKET FINISH SCHEDULE FINISH SCHEDULE FINISH SCHEDULE CHECK-IN AND CHECK-OUT TRANSACTION COUNTERS - QZ1 REFER TO FINISH LEGEND TYPICAL EXAM ROOM 2 TYPICAL EXAM ROOM 3 TYPICAL EXAM ROOM 4 TYPICAL EXAM ROOM 4. PROVIDE LOCKS ON THE CABINETS BELOW: A6.1 SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0" A6.1 SCALE: 3/8" = l'-0" A6.1 SCALE: 3/8" = l'-0" A6.1 SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" A. TRIAGE 2: LOCKSET TYPE B CABINET TYPE: B06 QUANTITY: 1 SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY: B. ADMIN: LOCKSET TYPE B CABNIET TYPE: B07 ADJACENT TO CABINET D10, TYPICAL CABINET TYPE: B11 4SD Aj?e rCk4 \1l, QUANTITY: 1 � LOUISE M. C4 C. NURSE STATION: LOCKSET TYPE B W SCHLATTER 0 A6.4 CABINET TYPE: W03(WITH 5 SHELVES)ABOVE SK6 1'3 A6.4 QUANTITY: 1 TOLEDO,OH 6'-5" 1'-0" CABINET TYPE: W02-36 UPPER WALL CABINET ADJACENT N� ARI-11622 RETURN GYPSUM 14"tlic �Cs� BOARD AT END OF EACH TO I SINK QUANTITY: 1 F ( 0 GYPSUM BOARD W02-30 SOFFIT W02-24 ° PAINT PT2 SOFFIT-TYPICAL CABINET TYPE: B07 ADJACENT TO CABINET D10, TYPICAL 09/02/2021 FINISHED END PANEL D. MANAGER: LOCKSET TYPE A / \ CABINET TYPE: B07, TYPICAL PROJECT INFORMATION: FILLER PANEL- - / - _ - 3/8" _ = 4 3/8" CABINET TYPE: B08, TYPICAL / TYPCIAL�� TEMPERED TEMPERE co O EN / TRANSACTION / \ \ / GLASS GLASS �\ E. PHYSICIAN OFFICE: LOCKSET TYPE C v / OPEN UNDER CABINET / COUNTERTOP CABINET TYPE: B07, TYPICAL / LIGHTING -REFER TO \ T I GA R D O R ELECTRICAL DRAWINGSCABINET TYPE: B08, TYPICAL / 9., .7" , 7 7,. , 7 „ 1 ALUMINUM FRAME AT OR OR o 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. CORKBOARD-TYPICAL-1--a" YPICAL OPEN OPEN N OPEN OPEN CABINET TYPE: ALL WALL CABINETS, TYPICAL \ COUNTERTOP AND TIGARD, OREGON 97223 \ BACKSPLASCOORDINATE WITH FRANCHISEE FOR NUMBER OF KEYS QUARTZ \ e H e e o o REQUIRED FOR EACH TYPE OF LOCKSET. o TRANSACTION \ D10-36 a D10-36 D10-36 e o N COUNTER \\ N OPEN BASE- REFER TO OPEN HOPEN `o \ FINISH SCHEDULE o e v BASE- REFER TO FINISH SCHEDULE v PAINT PT2 GENERAL NOTES 1. REFER TO SHEET A1.3 FOR TOILET ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE B07-18B11-21 B07-18 2. REFER TO SHEET Al.1 FOR PARTITION TYPES B BASE-REFER TO WORKSTATION BRACKET AT 4'-0"ON FILLER PANEL BETWEEN FINISHED END PANEL AT ALL 3. REFER TO SHEET Al A FOR FINISH SCHEDULE B FINISH SCHEDULE CENTER MAXIMUM WHERE INDICATED DRAWERS-TYPICAL EXPOSED SIDES-TYPICAL 4. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR RECEPTACLE FILLER PANEL BETWEEN PLACEMENT DRAWERS-TYPICAL 5. REFER TO SHEET A7.1 FOR EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORY MOUNTING HEIGHTS 6. PROVIDE GROMMETS TYPICAL: 5 CHECK OUT 6 ADMIN 7 ADMIN 8 CHECK IN A. PHYSICIAN OFFICE WORKSURFACE-(1)CENTERED-BACK LOCATION AT EACH PHYSICIAN'S WORKSTATION. CLIENT INFORMATION: A6.1 SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0" A1.1 SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" A1.1 SCALE: 3/8"= l'-0" A6.1 SCALE: 3/8"= l'-0" B. MANAGER OFFICE WORKSURFACES-(1)AT EACH STRAIGHT COUNTER AND(1)AT CORNER CENTERED- BACK LOCATION. C. ADMINISTRATION/NURSE STATION/TRIAGE 1: (1) TYPICAL AT EACH D10 DRAWER AND (1)AT B11 CABINETS, O CENTERED-BACK LOCATION TYPICAL. D. EXAM ROOM -(1) CENTERED-BACK AT OPEN COUNTERTOP(TYPICAL (A1/A6.3) 7. PROVIDE 18"W X 12"H ACCESS PANEL AT 18"AFF TO CENTERLINE OF PANEL, CENTERED UNDER EACH AMERICAN FAMILY DRAWER LOCATION AT NURSE STATION AND ADMIN,IN, TYPICAL. CARE 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD BIRMINGHAM, AL 35242 CLIENT PROJECT NO: GYPSUM BOARD OWNER PROVIDED FINISHED END PANEL Al -REFER TO GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT AT ALL EXPOSED SIGNAGE SCHEDULE W02-21 W02-36 W02-36 SOFFIT-TYPICAL MICROWAVE-18"H MAXIMUM SIDES-TYPICAL UNDER CABINET W02-39 W02-39 01-27 W02-27 W02-36 IV LIGHTING-REFER TO - - x ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS o o / \ \ UNDER CABINET / \ / \ w a ALUMINUM FRAMEOur mission is to provide the best healthcare LIGHTING -REFER o - _ _ - x AT CORKBOARD- TO ELECTRICAL \ / \ / SK17 z possible,1,.kind and ca,log or,vacumirrit, 7i while respecting the rights of all patients,in an TYPICAL DRAWINGS \ / \ / \ / W economical manner,at comes and[cc ADA COMPLIANT v corvec�ent to the p.tiorit, U. r MICROWAVE 0 w FILLER PANEL COUNTERTOP LOCATION J AND BACKSPLASH W W ivo LL LL w 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL FINISHED END PANEL COUNTERTOP FSK-1-9] W W x AT ALL EXPOSED AND BACKSPLASH o e o o O o o m x o; () NO. DATE SUBJECT A e e SIDES -TYPICAL W x FILLER PANEL 9 / \ _ _ _ _ SK 88 A REVISION BASE - REFER TO N FINISH LEGEND FINISH END iv m W 1 1001 Architects, L.L.C. v 001 Madison Avenue PANEL-TYPICAL \ Toledo OH 43604 BASE - REFERT. (419)255-3830 B07-18 B07-18 TO FINISH B02-39 B02-39 2'-0" SO4-3L k 4 WORKSTATION BRACKET AT 2 6 SCHEDULE N TL1 REFER TO FLOOR PLAN PROJECT NO: 02 1 -01 005-00 w 4'-0"ON CENTER MAXIMUM PL4 FOR AFC GRAPHIC WIDTH PROJECT MANAGER: M.ALFIERI Q TL2 DESIGNED: T. McMAHON of /00 9 MANAGER 10 BREAKROOM 11 AFC GRAPHIC - PLAIN CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER o A1.1 SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0" A1., SCALE: 3/8"= l'-O" A6.1 SCALE: 3/8" = l'-0" DRAWING TITLE: o INTERIOR ELEVATIONSa< o(n � o u- LL N DRAWING NO: 4 N A6. 1 m 2 2 m 8 Q 1 2 3 4 CASEWORK NOTES W05-18 W02-18 W02-36 W04-33 W04-33 W04-30 W04-30 W04-30 OO ssoeo FILLER PANEL UNDER CABINET 1. CASEWORK DESIGNATIONS: B 01 - 24 FILLER PANEL \ / \ FILLER PANEL / \ / \ LIGHTING-REFER UNDER CABINET \ I / \ \ \ TO ELECTRICAL CASEWORK CATEGORY LIGHTING-REFER o nn DRAWINGS B = BASE CABINET TO ELECTRICAL TL2 M TL2/ \ / \ / \ FILLER PANEL D= DRAWER DRAWINGS / \ / PLASTIC LAMINATE s TL1 TL1 W=WALL CABINEASE T END PLANEL AT 2" CONSULTANTS: ALUMINUM COUNTERTOP CABINET STYLE- REFER TO FRAME AT SK1 HEIGHT DIFFERENCE PLUG MOLD - MOUNT TIGHT TO CORKBOARD- OR o SK3 SK2 TOP OF BACK SPLASH. REFER SHEETS A6.1 AND A6.2 TYPICAL PL1 i� PL4 TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS. COUNTERTOP AND WIDTH (IN INCHES) COUNTERTOP AND e e Y = = nAD eBACKSPLASH BACKSPLASH Z OPEN OPEN OPEN FINISHED END PANEL AT ALL 2. ALL BASE CABINET DEPTHS ARE TO BE 24"AND ALL WALL z ADJ. ADJ. ADJ. EXPOSED SIDES-TYPICAL CABINET DEPTHS ARE TO BE 14" INCHES UNLESS NOTED O OTHERWISE ON DRAWINGS FILLER PANEL OPEN OPEN OPEN b ADJ. ADJ. ADJ. 3. MATERIALS: FILLER PANEL („ UPPER CABINETS- PLAM2 C LOWER CABINETS - PLAM2 BASE-REFER TO B06-18 B06-18 SO4-36 FILLER PANEL SO4-30 B12-24 B12-24 B12-24 B12-24 COUNTERTOPS AND TRANSACTION COUNTERS- PLAM3 C FINISH SCHEDULE NURSES STATION FRONT VERTICAL LAMINATE - PLAM4 2 PROCEDURE NURSES STATION LAMINATE REVEALS- PLAM5 CHECK-IN AND CHECK-OUT TRANSACTION COUNTERS- QZ1 1 TRIAGE A1.1 SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" NOTE: REFER TO A1.5 FINISH FLOOR PLAN REFER TO FINISH LEGEND A1.1 SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0" FOR RAIL LOCATION AT PROCEDURE. 4. PROVIDE LOCKS ON THE CABINETS BELOW: A. TRIAGE 2: LOCKSET TYPE B CABINET TYPE: B06 QUANTITY: 1 SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY: COLUMN B. ADMIN: LOCKSET TYPE B CABNIET TYPE: B07 ADJACENT TO CABINET D10, TYPICAL D AR SURFACE CABINET TYPE: 611 11 3 1/2 10'-10"VERIFY IN FIELD QUANTITY: 1 LOUISEl SURFACE SURFACE M. 3"DIAMETER WOOD VERIFY IN FIELD CYLINDERS PAINTED 3"DIAMETER WOOD ~ CHI-AT E PTS CYLINDERS PAINTED C. NURSE STATION: LOCKSET TYPE B W SCHLATTER (� CABINET TYPE: W03(WITH 5 SHELVES)ABOVE SK6 04 PT5 3"DIAMETER QUANTITY: 1 TOLEDO,OH WOOD CYLINDERS CABINET TYPE: W02-36 UPPER WALL CABINET ADJACENT f1RI-11622 �0 WORKSTATION PAINTED PT5 TO PL-1 SINK BRACKET AT 4'-0" e m e CURVE 1 /2" 11/2" 11/2" URVED 11/2" 11/2" 1 /2" QUANTITY: 1 F (L ON CENTER D10-36 = D10-36 '9 '4 e \ 2' 0" 2'-0" 2'-0" 2'-0" PLASTIC RVE 2'-0" 2'-0" MAXIMUM n h _ n LAMINATE CABINET TYPE: B07 ADJACENT TO CABINET D10, TYPICAL FILLER PANEL N 1..i - � PANELS WITH 09/02/2021 BETWEEN e e 1 1/2"REVEALS D. MANAGER: LOCKSET TYPE A DRAWERS- CABINET TYPE: B07, TYPICAL TYPICAL - PROJECT INFORMATION: B08-18 08-18 B01-18 BASE-REFER TO A5 BASE-REFER TO A5 CABINET TYPE: 808, TYPICAL AS FINISH SCHEDULE FINISH SCHEDULE E. PHYSICIAN OFFICE: LOCKSET TYPE C FINISHED END PANEL, TYPICAL A6.3 FINISHED END PANEL, TYPICAL A6.3 A6.3 A6.3 CABINET TYPE: B07, TYPICAL T I GA R D, O R AT ALL EXPOSED SIDES AT ALL EXPOSED SIDES FILLER PANEL BETWEEN CABINET TYPE: B08, TYPICAL DRAWERS -TYPICAL 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. CABINET TYPE:ALL WALL CABINETS, TYPICAL 3 NURSE STATION 4 NURSE STATION 5 NURSE STATION s NURSE STATION COORDINATE WITH FRANCHISEE FOR NUMBER OF KEYS TIGARD, OREGON 97223 lee REQUIRED FOR EACH TYPE OF LOCKSET. A6.2 SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" A6.2 SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0" A1.1 SCALE: 3/8" = T-0" A1.1 SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0" GENERAL NOTES W02-36 W02-39 W02-39 W02-39 W02-36 W02-36 W02-36 W02-36 W02-36 1. REFER TO SHEETAI.3 FOR TOILET ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE B 2. REFER TO SHEET Al.1 FOR PARTITION TYPES 0 FINISHED END PANEL, / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ 3. REFER TO SHEET A1.4 FOR FINISH SCHEDULE B TYPICAL AT ALL / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ 4. REFER TO ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR RECEPTACLE \ O O T = _ _ -- _ _ - b EXPOSED SIDES = _ -- _ _ _ _ -- _ _ -- _ _ o PLACEMENT UNDER CABINET 5. REFER TO SHEET A7.1 FOR EQUIPMENT AND ACCESSORY \ TL1 \ / \ / \ / \ / MOUNTING HEIGHTS LIGHTING-REFER TO / \ / 6. PROVIDE GROMMETS TYPICAL: \ SKI ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS A. PHYSICIAN OFFICE WORKSURFACE-(1)CENTERED-BACK \ ALUMINUM FRAME LOCATION AT EACH PHYSICIAN'S WORKSTATION. CLIENT INFORMATION: \ SURFACE B. MANAGER OFFICE WORKSURFACES- 1 AT EACH SKS SK3 gK2 b AT CORKBOARD OR o ( ) N PLUG MOLD, MOUNT N STRAIGHT COUNTER AND(1)AT CORNER CENTERED- BACK LOCATION. TIGHT TO TOP OF C. ADMINISTRATION/NURSE STATION/TRIAGE 1: (1) O O SK7 BACKSPLASH -REFER TO FILLER PANEL BIO PL4 WASTE e e ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS m e e e 3"DIAMETER TYPICAL AT EACH D10 DRAWER AND (1)AT B11 CABINETS, CENTERED-BACK LOCATION TYPICAL. COUNTERTOP AND , , \ , , \ WOOD D. EXAM ROOM -(1) CENTERED-BACK AT OPEN > BACKSPLASH _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 4 ' PAINT PTSS COUNTERTOP (TYPICAL(A1/A6.3) 7. PROVIDE 18"W X 12"H ACCESS PANEL AT 18"AFF TO \ / \ / CENTERLINE OF PANEL, CENTERED UNDER EACH D10 AMERICAN FAMILY / FINSIHED END PANEL- PLASTIC LAMINATE DRAWER LOCATION AT NURSE STATION AND ADMIN, TYPICAL. PLASTIC LAMINATE ON PANELS WITH 609-20 SO4-27L B09-20 B02-27 2'-1" 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD B02-36 B02-36 B02-36 B02-36 SO4-36 � REVEALS CARE FINISHED END PANEL- 2'-6" PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PARTICLEBOARD NURSE STATION 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD 7 NURSE STATION 8 NURSE STATION 9 BIRMINGHAM, AL A1.1 SCALE: 3/8"= T-0" A1.1 SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0" A6.2 SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0' 35242 CLIENT PROJECT NO: GYPSUM BOARD SOFFIT GYPSUM BOARD FILLER PANEL W02-36 W02-33 W02-36 SOFFIT W02-30 W02-30 W02-27 UNDER CABINET LIGHTING -REFERFILLER PANEL / TO ELECTRICAL / / \ \ / / \ \ / / \ \ UNDER CABINET DRAWINGSo __ __ _ LIGHTING -REFER _ __ L _ _ � o \ / M TO ELECTRICAL %\ - % h \\ // 11" 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL \ / ALUMINUM FRAME \ / \ / \ / DRAWINGS \ / \ / 11" \ / NO I DATE I SUBJECT A AT CORKBOARD - \ / \ 8 / \ / ALUMINUM FRAME \ / TYPICAL AT CORKBOARD- \ / TYPICAL \ / u A REVISION OR ISSUE OR COUNTERTOP oILL OR OR o S20 S21 1001 Madison Avenue AND BACKSPLASH COUNTERTOP iv ToledoAOH143604LLC. AND BACKSPLASH U / \ T. (419)255-3830 SUPPORT BRACKETS AT e // \\ N e 4'-0"ON CENTER e o / \ PROJECT NO: 021 -01 005-00 a- FILLER MAXIMUM. v v / \ PROJECT MANAGER: M. ALFIERI PANEL e e // \\ DESIGNED: T. McMAHON of BASE-REFER TOL CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER LO BASE- REFER TO FINISH LEGEND FINISH LEGEND FINISHED B08-18L B07-18 B07-18 DRAWING TITLE: o EXPOSED SII ESANEL TYPCALD ATLL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS oQ aN o .. ,o PHYSICIANS OFFICE 11 PHYSICIANS OFFICE ,2 PHYSICIANS OFFICE CC A1.1 SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" A1.1 SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0" A1.1 SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" to 13 CORRIDOR a LL N A6.2 SCALE: 3/8"= 1'-0" DRAWING NO: 4 N A6.260) � Q m0 1 2 3 q 1 2 3 4 2'-1"UNLESS FAUCET AND SINK- 2'-1" UNLESS NOTED O O 9soee NOTED OTHERWISE REFER G PLUMBING OTHERWISE SIDE SPLASH 2'-1" UNLESS NOTED DRAWINGS 2'-1"UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE OTHERWISE SCRIBE STRIP SCRIBE STRIP AND SEALANT PLASTIC LAMINATE ON SCRIBE STRIP AND SEALANT PLASTIC LAMINATE ON AND SEALANT PROVIDE CONTINUOUS 1 1/4"PARTICLE BOARD 1 1/4" PARTICLE BOARD SCRIBE STRIP AND SEALANT SEALANT PLASTIC LAMINATE PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" ON 1 1/4" PARTICLE CONSULTANTS: -CT 3 PARTICLE BOARD BACKSPLASH 'v PARTICLE BOARD BACKSPLASH PARTICLE BOARD BACKSPLASH BOARD WOOD BLOCKING PLASTIC LAMINATE ON PLASTIC LAMINATE ON v 1 1/4 PARTICLE BOARD BACKSPLASH B r OARD PLASTIC LAMINATE - pON 3/4" PARTICLE - - - - - - - - - - ° BOARD DRAWER WOOD BLOCKING 2X WOOD BLOCKING 4"WIRE PULL o O PLASTIC LAMINATE z - z =' ? ON 3/4"PARTICLE 0 Q WOOD BLOCKING 0 _ > BOARD W w O DRAWER AND SLIDES w � C Z J z w 0 �O z w 0 C — w 4"WIRE PULL w O w WHITE MELAMINE ON ALL w w 4"WIRE PULL w INTERIOR EXPOSED z _ �_ w PLASTIC LAMINATE ON WHITE MELAMINE ON SURFACES — p PLASTIC LAMINATE ON F- o Y w.:_. O0 LL = 3/4"PARTICLE BOARD 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD ALL INTERIOR -' PLASTIC LAMINATE ON o DOOR ( FIXED SHELF EXPOSED FACES � 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD LL • 0 w DOOR PLASTIC LAMINATE ON w w PLASTIC LAMINATE LL � PLASTIC LAMINATE ON AD PARTICLE BOARD PLASTIC LAMINATE ON BOARD DOOR LE ADJUSTABLE SHELF • 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD ALL EXPOSED SURFACES ADJUSTABLE SHELF WHITE MELAMINE ON ALL SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY: PREDRILLED SHELF HOLES INTERIOR EXPOSED AT 1 1/2"ON CENTER SURFACES PREDRILLED SHELF HOLES 'v BASE- REFER TO AT 1 1/2"ON CENTER FINISH LEGEND OD BNS - REEFER LEGEND O 3 BASE - REFER TO 3 3 BASE-REFER TO 3 �1� r� FINISH LEGEND FINISH LEGEND LOUISE M. C� xW SCHLATTER c, CASEWORK SECTION (1301 ) c2 CASEWORK SECTION (1302 c3 CASEWORK SECTION 1303) c4 CASEWORK SECTION (SO4 TOLEDO, OH A6.3 SCALE: 1 1/2" = V-0" A6.3 SCALE: 1 1/2"= V-0" A6.3 SCALE: 1 1/2"= 1'-0" A6.3 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" NT ARI-11622 QCs° 2'-1" UNLESS NOTED (//0► /� ` ' �' � � OTHERWISE 2'-1" UNLESS NOTED e. 09/02/2021 SCRIBE AND SEALANT 2'-," UNLESS NOTED 2'-1" UNLESS NOTED 2'-1" UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" OTHERWISE OTHERWISE SCRIBE STRIP AND SEALANT PROJECT INFORMATION: OTHERWISE PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD BACKSPLASH PARTICLE BOARD BACKSPLASH PLASTIC LAMINATE SCRIBE AND SEALANT SCRIBE AND SEALANT SCRIBE AND SEALANT ON 1 1/4"PARTICLE -� PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" s'•"` * ` PLASTIC LAMINATE PLASTIC LAMINATE PLASTIC LAMINATE BOARD x v PARTICLE BOARD BACKSPLASH ON 1 1/4"PARTICLE v PARTICLE BOARD BACKSPLASH ON 1 1/4"PARTICLE 'v PARTICLE BOARD BACKSPLASH ON 1 1/4"PARTICLE 3/ T I GA R D, OR = BOARD BOARD Uw' PLASTIC LAMINATE ON n* = r .. .�:' = -at= e _� BOARD _ 11/4' PARTICLEBOARD � �� �� �� �� 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. _ � WOOD BLOCKING - - - - - WOOD BLOCKING - TIGARD, OREGON 97223 WOOD BLOCKING - — _ — — — — — — O WOOD BLOCKING - z TYPICAL — — — w z - - - - - - - - - - TYPICAL - - - - - - - - - TYPICAL Z O WOOD BLOCKING - O 0 z z z FILE DRAWER C1 TYPICAL ¢ — — — — — — — — — w O PLASTIC LAMINATE O PLASTIC LAMINATE 0 w j W Z — — — — — — — — — — F ON 3/4"PARTICLE P ON 3/4" PARTICLE ZO w O PLASTIC LAMINATE ON > BOARD DRAWER > — — — — — — — — — O BOARD DRAWER > — — — — — — — — — — PLASTIC LAMINATE w W Z 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD w p a FRONT-SIDES, w z0 — — — — — _ _ — — — — W FRONT-SIDES, w — — — — — — — — — — „ ON 3/4"PARTICLE w Z ' 4"WIRE PULL B R DRAWER FRONT- rn — — — — — — — — — — BACK AND BOTTOM BACK AND BOTTOM w R h B F p - 0 SIDES, BACK AND 0 w — — — — — — — — — O w O w FRONT-SIDES, BACK W 0 TO BE WHITE z TO BE WHITE z - ? — — — — — — — — — — w BOTTOM TO BE WHITE 'E MELAMINE g MELAMINE g AND BOTTOM TO BE z PLASTIC LAMINATE ON w - w - w - 3/4"PARTICLE BOARD O — — — — — — — — — — MELAMINE z DRAWER SLIDES z DRAWER SLIDES z WHITE MELAMINE 0 LL DOOR DOOR 4"WIRE PULL O 0 O 0 FILE DRAWER 4"WIRE PULL 0 O FILE DRAWER w F u W b LL O 4"WIRE PULL w LL w DRAWER SLIDES w 0 4"WIRE PULL w W W PLASTIC LAMINATE CwJ W - - - - - w W - - - - - - - - - - - LL ri E CLIENT INFORMATION: - - — — — — — — — w _ ON ALL EXPOSED - - - - - - - - SURFACES HEAVY DUTY BASE-REFER TO DRAWER SLIDES FINISH LEGEND BASE - REFER TO FINISH LEGEND 'v O 3 BASE- REFER TO 3" 3" 3 BASE- REFER TO 1/4 BASE-REFER TO FINISH LEGEND FINISH LEGEND FINISH LEGEND B, CASEWORK SECTION (1305) 82 CASEWORK SECTION (1306) B3 CASEWORK SECTION (1307) 64 CASEWORK SECTION (1308) 65 CASEWORK SECTION (1309) AMERICAN FAMILY A6.3 SCALE: 1 1/2"= V-0" A6.3 SCALE: 1 1/2"= 1'-0" A6.3 SCALE: 1 1/2"= V-0" A6.3 SCALE: 1 1/2" = 1'-0" A6.3 SCALE: 1 1/2"= V-0" CARE 1'-0" PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 1 1/4" 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD PARTICLE BOARD ON 3/4" PLYWOOD BLOCKING BIRMINGHAM, AL 2'-1"UNLESS NOTED 2'-1"UNLESS NOTED 2'-1" UNLESS NOTED 2'-1' UNLESS NOTED 35242 OTHERWISE OTHERWISE OTHERWISE OTHERWISE WOOD CYLINDER 3" DIAMETER TED N 3"GROMMET COORDINATE LO SCRIBE STRIP AND SEALANT SCRIBE STRIP AND SEALANT SCRIBE STRIP AND SEALANT SCRIBE STRIP AND SEALANT BOLTED THROUGH INTO LOCATION WITH OWNER CLIENT PROJECT NO: PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" BLOCKING PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 1 1/4" PARTICLE BOARD BACKSPLASH PARTICLE BOARD BACKSPLASH PARTICLE BOARD BACKSPLASH PLASTIC PARTICLE BOARD BACKSPLASH PLASTIC LAMINATE PLASTIC LAMINATE ON PARTICLE BOARD NOTE: 3"GROMMETS COORDINATE NOTE: 3"GROMMETS COORDINATE PLASTIC LAMINATE LAMINATE ON 1 'a ON 1 1/4" 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD 2'-1" UNLESS NOTED LOCATION WITH OWNER LOCATION WITH OWNER ON 1 1/4" 1/4"PARTICLE PARTICLE BOARD x PARTICLE BOARD PAR � - -R BOARD OTHE 4" MAX. OTHERWISE { 1 = ... 1„ 4"WIRE PULL — — _ _ — — — — — — 4' WIRE PULL � FIRE RETARDANT TREATED e N — - - - - - - d - - - - - - - - - - c WOOD BLOCKING — - - - - v f (0 PLASTIC - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - DRAWER SLIDES � rn 4"WIRE PULL cn z WOOD BLOCKING � z0 1 1/4"PARTICLE BOARD z0 z 0 O z PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4"CONTINUOUS Q 3/4"CONTINUOUS c _ PLASTIC LAMINATE ¢ 1 1/2"X 1 1/2"ALUMINUM ¢ 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD PLYWOOD > rn PLYWOOD q ^ ON 3/4" PARTICLE ¢ W U) ANGLE BEYOND W CO DRAWER W Z W z iv BOARD DRAWER w Z w O w 0 w 0 PLASTIC LAMINATE ON w 0 PLASTIC LAMINATE ON PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" 4"WIRE PULL w O cn X WOOD BLOCKING w W ALL EXPOSED Z W z O Z O w ALL EXPOSED SURFACES PARTICLE BOARD ON 3/4" 0 z 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL 0 w _ w w SURFACES PLYWOOD DRAWER SLIDE y w W w DRAWER SLIDE w o _ PLASTIC LAMINATE ON w NO. DATE SUBJECT A H —0 F- 0 F-. o PLASTIC LAMINATE ON - 1 1/2"x 1 1/2"ALUMINUM z 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD 2" DIA WIRE z A REVISION OR ISSUE 0 ? 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD 0 0 O 0 ANGLE AT PERIMETER 0 0 POWER AND DATA ON O ADJUSTABLE SHELF 'i ADJUSTABLE SHELF MANAGEMENT HOLE (2) p O W OF COUNTER F- '� REMOVABLE PANEL- LL SSOE Architects, L.L.C. PLACES AT EACH STUD BASE-REFER TO w PREDRILLED SHELF REFER TO ELECTRICAL 1001 Madison Avenue w WORKSTATION BRACKET w w PREDRILLED SHELF LL w Toledo OH 43604 W AT 4'-0"ON CENTER w FINISH LEGEND w HOLES AT 1 1/2"ON w HOLES AT 1 1/2"ON 3/4" PLASTIC CONSTRUCTION BY W T. (419)255-3830 MAXIMUM WHERE CENTER CENTER LAMINATE MILLWORK MANUFACTURE PLASTIC LAMINATE — — v INDICATED REVEAL-TYPICAL o ON 1" PARTICLE - ,u , .... DRAWER SLIDES m PLASTIC LAMINATE ON PROJECT NO: O21 -O 1 OO5-OO a_ BASE-REFER TO BOARD FINISHED 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD w FINISH LEGEND END BEYOND ' `v PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PROJECT MANAGER: M.ALFIERI 2 PLASTIC LAMINATE ON PARTICLE BOARD DRAWER BASE-REFER TO DESIGNED: T. McMAHON ¢i 3/4"PARTICLE BOARD FINISH LEGEND 0 3" DRAWER 3„ CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER BASE- REFER TO BASE- REFER TO FIRE RETARDANT TREATED o FINISH LEGEND FINISH LEGEND WOOD BLOCKING DRAWING TITLE: o CASEWORK SECTION (TYPICAL CASEWORK SECTIONS a,m O (N A, CASEWORK SECTION (TYPICAL) A2 CASEWORK SECTION (D10) A34 SECTION (1311 ) A4 CASEWORK SECTION (1312) A5 AT NURSE STATION A6.3 SCALE: 1 1/2"= V-0" A6.3 SCALE: 1 1/2"= T-0" A6.3 SCALE: 1 1/2"= T-0" A6.3 SCALE: 1 1/2"= V-0" A6.3 SCALE: 1 1/2" = V-0" ~ Uo LL N DRAWING NO: ¢ A A6. 3 M 2 < m0 1 2 3 4 DECK ABOVE DECK ABOVE 0OOO ssoee 1 1/2"x 1 1/2"ALUMINUM ANGLE AT PREDRILLED SHELF COUNTER PERIMETER OF HOLES AT 1 1/2"ON CEILING SYSTEM-REFER CEILING SYSTEM -REFER 2x WOOD BLOCKING CONSULTANTS: CENTER CE REFLECTED CEILING TO REFLECTED CEILING 1' 0" — PLAN FOR HEIGHTS PLAN FOR HEIGHTS =-.:. n1_11RT 1/2' PLYWOOD 5/8"GYPSUM BOARD 1'-2" QUARTZ RETURN ON ENDS WHITE MELAMINE1'-2" - 2" ON ALL INTERIOR CORNER BEAD,TYPICAL 2'-1"UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE EXPOSED FACES 3 5/8" METAL STUDS • PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" Z PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" 4 MAX. PARTICLE BOARD g PARTICLE BOARD I _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Z a Z ~¢ ADJUSTABLE SHELF ADJUSTABLE SHELF v g 4"WIRE PULL z C > w O 4"WIRE PULL > v� PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" uj C z PARTICLE BOARD DOOR O w PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" O Lu O w WHITE MELAMINE ON ALL C p Z MICROWAVE SHELF- p Z o INTERIOR EXPOSED FACES PARTICLE BOARD DRAWER Lu COORDINATE POWER WITH o Lu W PLASTIC LAMINATE ON J UJ w p O PREDRILLED SHELF HOLES 1 1/4"PARTICLE BOARD WOOD BLOCKING w Lu ELECTRICAL p w z zof Ir AT 1 1/2"ON CENTER PLASTIC LAMINATE ON DRAWER SLIDE OL UNDER CABINET LIGHTING - OF LLO PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD uio w REFER TO ELECTRICAL � Z PARTICLE BOARD DOOR ~ w . I GYPSUM BOARD ON z LL Lu w w METAL STUDS-REFER O Of PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" 4"WIRE PULL TO FLOOR PLAN w Lu PARTICLE BOARD WITH 2" BASE- REFER TO LL w SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY: RADIUS AT CORNERS FINISH LEGEND PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 1" PATICLE BOARD PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" F NRS ED END BEYOND Ilk 0t��SD ARC PARTICLE BOARD APRON V-6" NOTE: PROVIDE ANTI-TIP + BRACE AT MICROWAVE PER MANUFACTURER �~ LO IAT E V', c, CASEWORK SECTION (W01 ) RECOMMENDATIONS. C2 CASEWORK SECTION (W06) ca CASEWORK SECTION 4V SCHLATTER A6.4 SCALE: 1 1/2"= 1'-0" A6.4 SCALE: 1 1/2"= 1'-0" A6.1 SCALE: 1 1/2"= ,'-0" TOLEDO,OH DECK ABOVE Nj� ARI-11622 ��$ DECK ABOVE 09/02/2021 77{� I I CEILING SYSTEM-REFER PROJECT INFORMATION: 7TO REFLECTED CEILING DECK ABOVE CEILING SYSTEM-REFER PLAN FOR HEIGHTS T I GA R D O R _ TO REFLECTED CEILING y1i 5/8"GYPSUM BOARD PLAN FORHEIGHTS 1 2 5/8"GYPSUM BOARD 3 5/8"METAL STUDS 3 5/8" METAL STUDS CEILING SYSTEM CEILING PLAN OR- REFER TO HEIGHTS 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. • PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" TIGARD, OREGON 97223 • PARTICLE BOARD PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" p ADJUSTABLE SHELF Z PARTICLE BOARD p ADJUSTABLE SHELF F w Z r co w 0 - LU CO p iz WHITE MELAMINE ON ALL INTERIOR EXPOSED FACES U) 2I I B O w NZ WHITE MELAMINE ON ALL Lu — TERIOR EXPOSED FACES z o PREDRILLED SHELF HOLES B Lu - O AT 1 1/2"ON CENTER z PREDRILLED SHELF HOLES OF LL L 0 p AT 1 1/2"ON CENTER w PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" CEILING SYSTEM -REFER w LL W PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" w PARTICLE BOARD DOOR GYPSUM BOARD REFLECTED • PARTICLE BOARD DOOR — — ( I PLOPN FOR HEIGHTS CEILING GYPSUM BOARD ON CLIENT INFORMATION: LL — — METALSTUDS 4"WIRE PULL 1'_6" 4"WIRE PULL N 2 PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD APRON LIGHT-REFER TO O PARTICLE BOARD APRON ELECTRICAL UNDER CABINET LIGHTING - UNDER CABINET LIGHTING - REFER TO ELECTRICAL CONTINUOUS REFER TO ELECTRICAL ALUMINUM TRACK AMERICAN FAMILY e, CASEWORK SECTION (W02) 62 CASEWORK SECTION (W03) GYPSUM BOARD- A6.4 SCALE: 11/2"= 1'-0" A6.4 SCALE: 11/2"= 1'-0" BEYOND 3/8"TEMPERED CARE GLASS WITH CONTINUOUS TRACK 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD DECK ABOVE DECK ABOVE ON OP AND SIDES ONLY BIRMINGHAM, AL 3 5/8" METAL STUDS I [o CONTINUOUS CLEAR 35242 ° 5/8"GYPSUM BOARD I; EACHONE SIDE SEALANT COUNTERTOP CLIENT PROJECT NO: LA QUARTZ CEILING SYSTEM- REFER 3/4"WHITE MELAMINE TO REFLECTED CEILING CEILING SYSTEM -REFER PLAN FOR HEIGHTS TO REFLECTED CEILING SHELVES v y PLAN FOR HEIGHTS ,�-2.. 2.. 1'-2" 2" 5/8"GYPSUM BOARD , 0 QUARTZ ON 1/2" PLYWOOD 3 5/8"METAL STUDS 19 QUARTZ RETURN ON ENDS PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" 2'-1" UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE lie Z PARTICLE BOARD STANDARD AND BRACKET 4.. MAX ;r UNLESS p ADJUSTABLE SHELF z SYSTEM - MINIMUM DESIGN H CAPACITY 400 LBS PER " > 1/4"TEMPERED GLASS ¢ STANDARD-REFER TO W z w Z PLASTIC LAMINATE ON ALL MANUFACTURER FOR w w O EXPOSED FACES SPACING PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 1 1/4" � 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL Z WHITE MELAMINE ON ALL cn W INTERIOR EXPOSED FACES O w PARTICLE BOARD z A w �_ 3"GROMMET COORDINATE O NO. DATE SUBJECT PREDRILLED SHELF HOLES w ¢ A REVISION OR ISSUE ? 1/4" PLEXIGLASS LOCATION WITH OWNER > y p AT 1 1!2"ON CENTER ? z SSOE Architects, L.L.C. O w p p DIVIDERS EQUALLY o_ v 1 1/2"x 1 1/2"ALUMINUM w o 1001 Madison Avenue PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" N co p 2 F w SPACES WITH BULLNOSE cn Lu PARTICLE BOARD DOOR w EDGE- REFER TO ANGLE AT PERIMETER OF LL Lu -- LL INTERIOR ELEVATIONS ._ w Toledo OH 43604 COUNTER � � T. (419 255-3830 ui FOR NUMBER OF WORK STATION BRACKET ~ o PROJECT NO: DIVIDERS 0 021 -01005-00 n- 4"WIRE PULL AT 4'-0"ON CENTER MAX o w w DESIGNED:ED T. ALFIERI ANAGER: Q ,:- ° GYPSUM BOARD ON � McMAHON of ' METAL STUDS-REFERLu CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER am PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" TO FLOOR PLAN o PLASTIC LAMINATE ON 3/4" PARTICLE BOARD APRON DRAWING TITLE: o PARTICLE BOARD APRON BASE - REFER TO CASEWORK SECTIONS oa UNDER CABINET LIGHTING - UNDER CABINET LIGHTING - FINISH LEGEND BASE-REFER TO a N REFER TO ELECTRICAL REFER TO ELECTRICAL FINISH LEGEND � o m� m� i A, CASEWORK SECTION (W04) A2 CASEWORK SECTION (W05) A3 CASEWORK SECTION A4 CASEWORK SECTION DRAWING NO: as A6.4 SCALE: 1 1/2"= ,'-0" A6.4 SCALE: 1 1/2"= 1'-0" A6.4 SCALE: 1 1/2"= 1'-0" A6.4 SCALE: 1 1/2" = ,'-0" o A6.4 'mw 2Q 1 2 3 4 00 L-3 1 2 3 4 WHERE OFFSET SINKS ARE REQUIRED FOR TOILET CLEARANCE OO ssoeo PLAN VIEW ADA COMPLIANT AND 36" GRAB BAR WILL NOT FIT, A PLAN VIEW ADA COMPLIANT WATER CLOSET 24" GRAB BAR MAY BE USED BEHIND WATER CLOSET W/SINK 60" IN. CLR TOILET. ALCOVE 24" MIN. 1 1 36"MIN. GRAB BA WALL TO GRAB BAR WALL TO INSIDE 11-01, 1 -0 INSIDE EDGE CONSULTANTS: 24"MIN. 12" MI EDGE OF GRAB BAR OF GRAB BAR a ¢ mTL24 m DOOR MANEUVERING CLEARANCES(LATCH ONLY-NO CLOSER) V) TL36 m z p - - - � 0 � _ xZl r w r O I H Fp W _O ¢ 0 � J I W z ¢ z F- 0 W O � 0 � a � AFI 2 � 3w z yyyJJJIIII Z a o _z w w I ¢ az"MIN. z z D F � ¢I vm w � NLu a H m w O o_I m � ww `oDIt 4" MIN. 18" MIN. O I ¢ oCLEAR x ~ CLEAR m m L 36" MIN. [MIE LL v PULL C ~ I FLOOR c� 0 Fm F= I FLOOR � C7 - SIDE - 3 I AREA J AREA- 16"- 18"_ - ~ O MAXIMUM VERTICAL RISE - - - - L - - ~ O TO CL TOILE TL18 r PUSH PUSH PUSH 16"- 18'- - - TL18 WALL 2e 4' SIDE z_ SIDE I z_ I SIDE z_ TO CL TOILET MOUNTED < I I g 60"MIN. CLR EXT BASELINE - - - , SIGN N I v a LOCATE FLUSH VALVE ON OPEN SIDE OF TEXT OF LOWEST m z L — — — — — J L — — — — — J WATER CLOSET 39"-41' VERTICAL GRAB BASELINE TEXT BRAILLE DOOR - BAR PLACEMENT OF HIGHEST TEX v 36" MIN. 12"MIN. 42" MIN. GRAB TACTILE CLEAR HINGE APPROACH LATCH APPROACH FORWARD APPROACH 24"MIN. -1-12"MIN. CHARACTER FLOOR BAR WIDTH 18" MIN.VERTICAL ton 1'-6"MIN. SPACE TL18 GRAB BAR v CENTERED ON TACTILE CHARACTER SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY: F DOOR MANEUVERING CLEARANCES(LATCH AND CLOSER) J ¢ c MOUNTING HEIGHTS FOR SIGNAGE LL TL36 m TL42 �ttED Aj? O w r LL EXCEPTION: SIGN WITH TACTILE CHARACTERS SHALL BE PERMITTED ON THE r - S C� o_ > w w O BEVEL CHANGE IN LEVEL j TL6 D v > m p TL6 PUSH SIDE OF DOORS WITH CLOSERS AND WITHOUT HOLD-OPEN DEVICES. �7 7 Z z z �y~� LOUISE M. X = o m Q 42" MIN. 1 .2 9P SCHLATTER n WC o � WC c2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS FOR SIGNAGE c3 CHANGES IN FLOOR LEVEL z4"MIN. 18-MIN LL ^ 36"MIN. PULL PULL I TOLEDO, OH A7.1 SCALE: 1/4"= 1'-0" REFER TO SHEET A1.6 FOR ADDITIONAL A7.1 SCALE: 3" = 1'-0" I SIDE SIDE N� ARI-11622 TOP OF HORIZONTAL. 00 SIGNAGE REQUIREMENTS - - - Y Cy0 GRAB BARS 7"_ 9"-7FRONT OF TOILET FIXTURE TO 1 PUSH PUSH F�°c CENTER OF TISSUE DISPENSER I PUSH 12" MIN. SIDE SIDE ( j,j/p� � 2 SIDE z 1 Z ldc i 1 FRONT ELEVATION VIEW-ADA COMPLIANT SIDE ELEVATION VIEW-ADA COMPLIANT WATER 09/02/2021 WATER CLOSET CLOSETm Clot I l a L PROJECT INFORMATION: I HI - - - - - - J _ _ _ _ _ c1 TYPICAL ACCESSIBLE TOILETS FOR TESTING J — _ _ .J HINGE APPROACH LATCH APPROACH FORWARD APPROACH A7.1 SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" NOTE: REMOTE FLUSH CONTROL- REFER TO PLUMBING DRAWINGS TIGARD, OR U.1 > ww Z Lu 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. O¢ O m w _j a O Ox O Zz � w ¢ 7 ¢ mw O m MANEUVERING CLEARANCES AT RECESSED DOORS-ALL FORWARD APPROACH TIGARD, OREGON 97223 of wa ~ CO Y z z m � m x W gQ om wz0- 0 w LU m am w a LL ww m w a r F_ —1 oU � > oa ao 0 zU) � of 00 = J0 0 o m I I ` I ' ` I ' ¢ _ opo I W z W z � w � <n x a o � m o � LL � x m TP OUTLET-DO IN-WALL BRACING TO SUPPORT FORCE c7 rn 1 z �J/ LL NOT MOUNT IN ALL DIRECTIONS-250 LBS. I � 2 12 MIN. � Q - BEHIND GRAB BAR - 18"MIN v a 4� 6 6"_ 4 B B X �W Z 4 D CID MOUNT AT CONSISTENT00 CID v v N 00 v v a a r o � p HEIGHT WITHIN EACH 32"MIN. CLEAR ¢ v n m ROOM/SPACE FLOOR LINE MINIMUM CLEAR DIMENSION IS MEASURED FROM THE INSIDE FACE OF MIRROR HEIGHT IS TO BOTTOM THE DOOR SLAB (HINGE SIDE) IN OPEN POSITION TO THE INSIDE FACE PULL SIDE PUSH SIDE PUSH SIDE CLIENT INFORMATION: OF REFLECTIVE SURFACE OF THE LATCH SIDE DOOR STOP. B, ACCESSIBLE MOUNTING HEIGHTS B3 DOOR WIDTH CLEARANCE B4 DOOR MANEUVERING CLEARANCES O A7.1 SCALE: 1/4"= 1'-0" A7.1 SCALE: 1" = 1'-0" A7.1 SCALE: 1/4" = 1'-0" 15" MIN. 15" MIN. 1'-6" 10 1'-6" 1'-3" 1'-3" WHERE OFFSET SINKS ARE PLAN VIEW ADA COMPLIANT REQUIRED FOR TOILET CLEARANCE PLAN VIEW ADA COMPLIANT AMERICAN FAMILY WATER CLOSET AND 36"GRAB BAR WILL NOT FIT,A WATER CLOSET W/SINK 60"MIN. CLR 24"GRAB BAR MAY BE USED BEHIND ALCOVE fr nL Tl o L3 TL1 o TL TL1 o TL2 N le TOILET. 24"MIN. Vz A CARE 36"MIN. GRAB BA WALL TO Y Z Y Y GRAB BAR WALL TO INSIDE 1 -0 1 -0 INSIDE EDGE o-i c 55 v m a m 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD 24" MIN. 12"MI EDGE OF GRAB BAR OF GRAB BAR 1 CLEAR 2w CLEAR w CLEAR w CLEAR w w FLOOR _ z FLOOR I_ z FLOOR _ z AREA � z BIRMINGHAM, AL ¢ m TL24 m L AREA J O AREA J AREA _ — — — J 35242 MAX. FLOOR TO m TL36 m z v O m 30"MIN. 30"MIN. 36"MIN. 36" MIN. SPOUT OUTLET z m O ~ MAX. FLOOR TO O r I v O F_ x F SPOUT OUTLET 0 m I co WC it z z WC 0 ¢ LAVATORY* LAVATORY*ONE SIDE LAVATORY*TWO LAVATORY*TWO SIDES CLIENT PROJECT NO: z 4 z ZO 13 a 1 z § O OBSTRUCTED OBSTRUCTED SIDES OBSTRUCTED OBSTRUCTED LESS THAN 24" z _ I of z w NOTE: REFER TO FLOOR NOTE: REFER TO FLOOR g 0 r- I < ? w rn w m w m O PLAN FOR TL3 LOCATION PLAN FOR TL3 LOCATION v _ O m w i?7o _ ¢ (7 iD �o _1 Q I co 04 O TW: h o O n � D w ¢ 1 m m � p a v m - w z 8., a U) g a —p =' a � v m w O I w TRAP WRAP KIT INCLUDING COVERS FOR VALVES, SUPPLY AND DRAIN LINES, TYPICAL ALL IN. M O CD m I w = CLAR m O SINKS WITH EXPOSED PLUMBING LINES (TOILET AND NON-TOILET AREAS), SUCH AS OTHER io - z b N h O x CLEAR p N O FLOORN °' 1 FLOOR N 1� —� c� ~ ( AREA J C7 m AREA F CLINICAL AND PATIENT AREAS. m F' - - - -16"- 18" - - % DRINKING FOUNTAIN FOR DRINKING FOUNTAIN FOR HIGH LOW - - - - - - - - O TO CL TOILE TL18 O 16"- 18 TL18 TL5 MIRROR UNLESS NOTED WHERE SINKS ARE NOT WHEELCHAIR USER STANDING PERSON 602.7 HIGH-LOW CONFIGURATION TO CL TOILE OTHERWISE IN DRAWINGS. RECESSED FOR KNEE 602.1-602.6 60"MIN. CLR PROVIDE MIRRORS IN TOILETS CLEARANCE AND CANE 2010 ADA STANDARDS FOR ACCESSIBLE DESIGN TL5 REQUIRES NO FEWER THAN TWO DRINKING ONLY. NO MIRRORS AT DETECTION 27" MINIMUM IS DRINKING FOUNTAIN KNEE AND TOE CLEARANCE LOCATE FLUSH VALVE ON OPEN SIDE OF CLINICAL HANDWASHING SINKS 1'-3" 1'-3" PERMITTED TO BEGIN FROM FOUNTAINS SHALL BE PROVIDED. ONE SHALL WATER CLOSET 39"-41 VERTICAL GRAB UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. LINO THE FRONT OF THE SINK 4" COMPLY WITH 602.1-602.6 AND ONE WITH 602.7 BAR PLACEMENT BACK. FROM 4"TO 8" FROM 12"MIN. 42"MIN. GRAB TL2/ 0 0 THE FRONT OF THE SINK IF ALCOVE IS TL1 L2 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL 24"OR MORE. FOR 24^+ MAXIMUM FROM FRONT EDGE BAR WIDTH 18"MIN. VERTICAL TL3 2 2— 3 THE HEIGHT IS 27" EVEN. A ALCOVE LESS - (INCLUDING BUMPERS) TO SPOUT I GRAB BAR w �� m m SK1 TL1 NO. DATE SUBJECT TL18 THAN 24"DEEP, 5" MAX. 15, IN. 36" MIN. ¢ Q ¢ TL8 A REVISION OR ISSUE FOLLOW LAYOUT lnz­ b( _ J O TL8 p v 0O v a SSOE Architects, L.L.C. ABOVE MINIMUM FROM 24" MIN. 12" MI 2 w a w a w O 1001 Madison Avenue CLEAR CLEAR TL 42 O j O O z CLEARANCE FOR T. 419 255-3830 z I e I SPOUT TO VERTICAL w f- C7 F- Lu LINE OF KNEE Toledo OH 43604 FLOOR o I FLOORSUPPORT TL36 � NC z p � g co z co z > ( } AREA �+ AREA ' * w ¢ TL6 0 m - LL r r g 11" WHEELCHAIR ch I I ,,.� LL TL7® 0 ,,, F- o ul - ACCESS o WC L6 Co v > m iD z U v p a O m m ILLp w w_M MIN PROJECT NO: 021 -01005-00 w - - - - - - - gm WC Z m a w F _ a a L - - - 4' O LLO m r 0 p m z O PROJECT MANAGER: M.ALFIERI Q 4'-0" m v Lu a LAVATORY*-FRONT ELEVATION LAVATORY*-SIDE ELEVATION DESIGNED: T. McMAHON of DRINKING FOUNTAIN UNLESS NOTED TOP OF HORIZONTAL. m 0 CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER u� DRINKING FOUNTAIN OTHERWISE OBSTRUCTED GRAB BARS 7"-9" FRONT OF TOILET FIXTURE TO *WALL-HUNG LAVATORY ILLUSTRATED. SAME CLEARANCES AND HEIGHTS APPLY TO VANITY o OBSTRUCTED-IN ALCOVE CENTER OF TISSUE DISPENSER COUNTERS. REFER TO MILLWORK SECTIONS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AT VANITY DRAWING TITLE: 12 o COUNTERS. FRONT ELEVATION VIEW-ADA COMPLIANT SIDE ELEVATION VIEW-ADA COMPLIANT WATER TYPICAL MOUNTING a¢ WATER CLOSET CLOSET DIMENSIONS ON TYPICAL TOILET ELEVATIONS APPLY TO ALL ELEVATIONS FOR VERTICAL AND HEIGHTS AND ° o HORIZONTAL DIMENSIONS UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE. Al ACCESSIBLE WATER FOUNTAIN A3 TYPICAL ACCESSIBLE TOILETS A4 ACCESSIBLE LAVATORIES ACCESSIBILITY DETAILS N a A7.1 SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" A7.1 SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" A7.1 SCALE: 3/8" = 1'-0" DRAWING NO: N o m A7. 1 �w � Q mo 2 3 4 1 12 3 4 SECTION 024119 -SELECTIVE DEMOLITION SECTION 033053-MISCELLANEOUS CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE SECTION 035413-GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT PART 3- EXECUTION OOO O 9soeo PART 1 - GENERAL (INTERIOR LOCATIONS ONLY) PART 1 - GENERAL 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," A. Section Includes: 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes self-leveling, gypsum cement underlayment for application below interior floor coverings. unless otherwise indicated. 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb,true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. procedures, and finishes. A. Product Data: For each type of product. accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking, and similar supports to comply with requirements for 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE attaching other construction. CONSULTANTS: 1.2 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Product Data: For each type of product. A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. required for this Project. panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones and their 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS to view. contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to Owner that may be A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications:A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, D. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner. products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance. following: 1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner. PART 2- PRODUCTS 1. Place gypsum cement underlayments only when ambient temperature and temperature of substrates 1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS are between 2. ICC-ES evaluation report for fastener. A. Engineering Survey: Submit engineering survey of condition of building. A. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. PART 2- PRODUCTS 3.2 PROTECTION B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including Drawings,that indicates the measures proposed 2.2 CONCRETE, GENERAL 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX)from weather. If, despite protection, for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control, and for noise control. A. Comply with ACI 301 (ACI 301M). A. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.Apply borate solution Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. 2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT 2.2 GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENTS by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label. C. Schedule of selective demolition activities with starting and ending dates for each activity. A. Reinforcing Bars:ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60(Grade 420), deformed. A. Gypsum Cement Underlayment: Self-leveling, gypsum cement product that can be applied in minimum D. Statement of Refrigerant Recovery: Signed by refrigerant recovery technician. B. Plain-Steel Welded-Wire Reinforcement:ASTM A 1064/A 1064M, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into uniform thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm)or as recommended by manufacturer for substrate, to match adjacent END OF SECTION 061053 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) flat sheets. floor elevations. C A. Inventory of items that have been removed and salvaged. 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS 1. Cement Binder: Gypsum or blended gypsum cement as defined by ASTM C 219. SECTION 064000-INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK C 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Cementitious Materials: 2. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4000 psi(27.6 MPa)at 28 days when tested according to PART 1 - GENERAL A. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by an EPA-approved certification program. 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type 1/11. ASTM C 472. 1.1 SUMMARY 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M, 1-inch nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer,formulated for use A. Provide interior architectural woodwork complete; as indicated on drawings, as specified, and as required A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct C. Chemical Admixtures: Certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated. for proper completion of work. selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm); or coarse sand as recommended by 1.2 DEFINITIONS B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as or admixtures containing calcium chloride. underlayment manufacturer. A. In addition to cabinetry, countertops, miscellaneous trim, and items indicated on drawings, interior practical. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture:ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork C. Notify Architect through the Construction Manager of discrepancies between existing conditions and 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. thickness required. items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture:ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F(21 deg C). 1.3 SUBMITTALS D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture:ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. D. Reinforcement: For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide galvanized metal lath or other A. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Owner through 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture:ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. corrosion-resistant reinforcement recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer. attachment devices, and other components. SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY. the Construction Manager. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture:ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type 11. E. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and 1. Show details full size. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. D. Water:ASTM C 94/C 94M. application indicated. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage 2.5 RELATED MATERIALS F. Surface Sealer: Designed to reduce porosity as recommended by manufacturer for type of floor covering reinforcement specified in other Sections. during selective demolition operations. A. Vapor Retarder: Plastic sheet,ASTM E 1745, Class A or B. to be applied to underlayment. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other items installec �,F ARC 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. B. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber, or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding PART 3- EXECUTION in architectural woodwork. , ri"D ARCt, G. Arrange selective demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's/Tenant's operations. cork. 3.1 PREPARATION B. Samples for verification: `� �7 1.7 WARRANTY 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Plastic and metal laminates. N, LOUISE M. �`�'' A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for application to fresh concrete. 1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent cracks 2. Solid surface. W SCHLATTER n selective demolition, by methods and with materials and using approved contractors so as not to void existing B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 3, burlap cloth or cotton mats. from telegraphing (reflecting)through underlayment. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 04 ,.i warranties. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. 2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking. A. Fabricator Qualifications: AWI/QCP certified fabricator/installer. Shop that employs skilled workers who TOLEDO, OH PART 2- PRODUCTS D. Water: Potable. B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, laitance, custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants successful in-service performace. ",','s ARI-11622 A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective A. Normal-Weight Concrete: that might impair underlayment bond. B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for .q G demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Minimum Compressive Strength:4000 psi (27.6 MPa)at 28 days. 1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test,ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation production of interior architectural woodwork. F B. Standards: Comply with ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. 2. Maximum W/C Ratio: 0.45. only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 Ib of water/1000 sq. ft. C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's"Architectural Woodwork Quality e( /,,(Qj � C. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches(100 mm)for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches(50 to 100 mm) before (1.36 kg of water/100 sq. m) in 24 hours. Standards"for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction,finishes, installation, ��{�/.?c � r/• T PART 3- EXECUTION adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch(25 mm). C. Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate movement and and other requirements. 09/02/2021 3.1 EXAMINATION 2.8 CONCRETE MIXING squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and remove sanding dust. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and furnish 1. Install underlayment reinforcement recommended in writing by manufacturer. A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been B. Perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might batch ticket information. D. Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes, sealants, and completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored n other than installed areas, store only in PROJECT INFORMATION result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during 1. When air temperature is above 90 deg F(32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond; prepare surfaces according to manufacturer's written areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in"Project Conditions"Article. selective building demolition operations. PART 3- EXECUTION instructions. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS C. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. 3.1 FORMWORK INSTALLATION E. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation,test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, 3.2 PREPARATION A. Design, construct, erect, brace, and maintain formwork according to ACI 301 (ACI 301 M). manufacturer's written instructions. and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg. F and relative A. Refrigerant: Before starting demolition, remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment according to 3.2 EMBEDDED ITEM INSTALLATION 3.2 APPLICATION humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period. R g having 9 q adjoining apply Y P 9 verify TIGARD O 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities havin jurisdiction. A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for ad'oinin work that is attached to A. General: Mix and a I underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Field Measurments: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, veri dimensions of other t 3.3 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions 1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. C A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them furnished with items to be embedded. recommended in writing by manufacturer. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 11 675 SW PACIFIC HWY. against damage. 3.3 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION 2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum adhesion to substrate and between coats. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and A. Install, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643; place sheets in position with longest 3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. T I GAR D, OREGON 97223 seal or cap off utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. dimension parallel with direction of pour. through underlayment. PART 2- PRODUCTS 1. Arrange to shut off utilities with utility companies. 1. Lap joints 6 inches(1 50 mm)and seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive or joint tape. B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. 2.1 MATERIALS 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary 3.4 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface. A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard(Custom-Grade)for services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems A. Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice"for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. 1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface. each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. to other parts of building. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. 2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. B. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, 3.5 JOINTS D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during 1. Hardboard:AHA A135.4 equipment, and components indicated on Drawings to be removed. A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. application and curing processes. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard:ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. B a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug B. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by 3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2 remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness underlayment manufacturer. 4. Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with requriements in ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, B b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or 3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT F. Apply surface sealer at rate recommended by manufacturer. except for density. compatible piping material and leave in place. A. Before test sampling and placing concrete,water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301 G. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that 5. Plywood: Marine grade ply. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. (ACI 301 M). emit a"hollow" sound when tapped. 6. Melamine:white d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement. C. Thermoset Decorative Panels: Particleboard or medium-density fiberboard finished with thermally fused, and store equipment;when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational. C. Consolidate concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301 (ACI 301 M). END OF SECTION 035413 malamine-impregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove 3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES 1. Provide 0.5mm PVC edge banding in case edge, shelf edges, and drawer box edge. CLIENT INFORMATION. equipment and deliver to Owner. A. Rough-Formed Finish:As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects SECTION 061053-MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 2. Provide 3mm PVC edge banding at drawer front edge and door front edge. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/2 inch (13 mm). PART 1 - GENERAL D. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, HDPL standard grade as indicated on the Finish ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. 1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view. 1.1 SUMMARY Legend. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork B. Smooth-Formed Finish:As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and A. Section Includes: 1. Provide at exposed cabinet exteriors, door/drawer interior materal, exposed surfaces, and finished material and leave in place. symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and 1. Wood blocking and nailers. ends. O 3.4 PROTECTION other projections exceeding 1/8 inch (3 mm). 2. Plywood backing panels. 2. Any exposed cabinet edge to be clad with laminate. Field verify casework in conjunction with A. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to 1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, or to be covered with a 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) windows, doors, sills, etc. prior to manufacturing. people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. coating or covering material applied directly to concrete. A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. E. Metal Laminate, solid surface material and cork surface as indicated on the Finish Legend. B. Temporary Shoring: Design, provide, and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following rubbed finish, defined in ACI 301 (ACI 301M), to smooth-formed-finished as- 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) 2.2 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to cast concrete where indicated: A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES: A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets, prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Smooth-rubbed finish. 1. Fire-retardant-treated wood. except for items specked in Division 8 Section"Door Hardware." AMERICAN FAMILY C. Remove temporary barricades and protections where hazards no longer exist. D. Related Unformed Surfaces:At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to 2. Power-driven fasteners. B. Hinges: Blum 120-degree hinge system, press in without plate 73T5580/175H9100; nickel plated. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final PART 2- PRODUCTS 1. 1200 Opening Capacity. CARE A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 2. Provide one pair per door to 48"in height, one and one-half pair per door over 48"unless noted as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as 3.8 FINISHING UNFORMED SURFACES A. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. otherwise. follows: A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. 2.2 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL C. Wire Pulls: Back mounted, Epco 4-inch wire pull, Satin finish, model#MC402-4-SS. 3700 CAHABA BEACH R D 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods Do not wet concrete surfaces. A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, D. Catches: Magnetic catches, BHMA A156.9, B03141. least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power B. Screed surfaces with a straightedge and strike off. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of E. Drawer Slides: Accuride Zinc plated, side mount, full extension, soft close, LD model#3832EC; nickel tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Temporarily cover openings to uniform and open-textured surface plane before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on surface. Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber plate. BIRMINGHAM, A L remain. 1. Do not further disturb surfaces before starting finishing operations. under the rules indicated. F. Door Locks: 35242 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing C. Scratch Finish:Apply scratch finish to surfaces indicated and surfaces to receive concrete floor topping or 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. -- -- CSM "--"' a oscceo�wc 15F, -- finished surfaces. mortar setting beds for ceramic or quarry tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded cementitious floor finishes 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back CW*„tt, c7w Is LOCK RW 3. Do not use cuttingtorches until work area is cleared of flammable materials.At concealed spaces, unless otherwise indicated. of each piece or omit rade stamp and provide certificates of rade compliance issued b cmou is VR s,a sn p p g p p g p y grading agency. cnw is smsE.uEmocs, CLIENT PROJECT NO: such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting D. Trowel Finish:Apply a hard trowel finish to surfaces indicated and to floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated. t'Q'g's 5'M NAI lcA ) operations. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations. to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another 2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALSX76 XSEMDOCR`OCKM cAWL= t ,g cmaris IOCKFtl* SAMNa,; 4. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 48 hours after flame-cutting operations. thin film-finish coating system. A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 srusaooa c1m.5 can 5. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose 1. Finish surfaces to the following tolerances, in accordance with ASTM E1155, for trafficked floor surface: or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the aasr w smatruIF am MSEMDR PIOCKMp excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. a. Specified overall values of flatness, Ff 25; and of levelness, F120;with minimum local values of test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet(3.2 m) CA",occ CMV is Kocrnuc 6. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 017419 flatness Ff 15; and of leveness FI 12. beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. WWI* C0� " "E WAS airs '"" � c "Construction Waste Management and Disposal." E. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a partial trowel finish, stopping after second troweling, to surfaces 1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant- c,o,sr,s smrtnAI B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to indicated and to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thinset methods. treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering G. Shelf rest: Hafele shelf pin spoon 5mm x 19mm nickel plated model#282.04.711. ensure minimum interference with roads, streets,walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used Immediately after second troweling, and when concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface wth a fine broom. according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. H. Metal File Supports:Wurth File Holder System KT432ZC-T/EA1058A. Zinc plated aluminum finish. facilities. 3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING 2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested 1. Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 3-inch OD, molded-plastic grommets and matching C. Removed and Salvaged Items: A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. plastic caps, color: charcoal. 1. Clean salvaged items. with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with ACI 301 (ACI 301 M)for hot-weather protection during curing. 3. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according to ASTM D 5664, and J. Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with product class 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. B. Evaporation Retarder:Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot,dry, or windy conditions cause design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841 requirements in BHMA A156.9. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and during finishing operations.Apply according to B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment K. For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product class 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. requirements in BHMA A156.9. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. finishing. C. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. I. Exposed Countertop Brackets: Steel brackets L-shaped. D. Removed and Reinstalled Items: C. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. D. Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated. 1. Product A& M Hardware, Inc. workstation wall bracket,flush mounted 15"x 21", white. 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. D. Curing Methods: Cure formed and unformed concrete for at least seven days by one or a combination of the 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER M. Countertop cleat: 1.25"x 1.25"x 18"PVC,white. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. following methods: A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, N. Shelf brackets: NO. DATE SUBJECT A 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: including the following: 1. Knape&Vogt: Standard and bracket 182 and 82, black, model#82BP BLK 63 and 182BP BILK 10.5. A REVISION OR ISSUE 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and a. Water. 1. Blocking. 0. Glass: provide per drawings. equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item b. Continuous water-fog spray. 2. Nailers. 1. Tempered glass with pencil polish edges, all edges. SSOE Architects, L.L.C. functional for use indicated. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and edges 3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 2. Glass retainer: Outwater adjustable panel/glass retainer, model#BC-1 0.95"0.95"x1.5"L x 14 gauge 1001 Madison Avenue E. ExistingItems to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during with 12-inch 300-mm la over adjacent absorptive covers. 4. Cants. steel angle, zinc plated. Toledo OH 43604 9 9 9 9 ( ) P ) P 9 P selective demolition.When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species. 3. J-channel: McMaster Car Aluminum jchannel style 3 model#8427A75; stainless steel finish. T. (419)255-3830 2 location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches(300 mm), and 2.5 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS P. Nurse Station transaction support brackets: 3"diameter wood cylinder painted Sherwin Willams Iron Ore d demolition operations are complete. sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears A. Equipment Backing Panels: Plywood, DOC PS 1,fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not SW7069. Internal connection: 10"threaded internal bolt recessed into the plywood sub-top through top PROJECT NO: 021 -01005-00 a. 3.6 CLEANING during curing period, using cover material and waterproof tape. indicated, not less than 3/4-inch (19-mm) nominal thickness. stand-off, attached and bolted through double blocking. w A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and recycle or dispose of them according to 3. Curing Compound:Apply uniform) in continuous operation b ower spray or roller according to 2.6 FASTENERS Q. Tack Surface: Koroseal Tac-wall cork 66 Suntan with metal edge -trim at all edges, color: clear aluminum PROJECT MANAGER: M.ALFIERI < 1 Y P 9 9 P PPY Y P YP P Y 9 9 1 9 Section 017419"Construction Waste Management and Disposal." manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for R. Acrylic Plexiglass to be clear gloss finish with all edges eased. Provide per drawings. DESIGNED: T. McMAHON o 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. material and manufacture. CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER 0 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area SECTION 064000 CONTINUED ON SHEET A9.2 0 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M DRAWING TITLE o debris to grade level in a controlled descent. B. Tests: Perform according to ACI 301 (ACI 301 M). of Type 304 stainless steel. c 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419"Construction Waste Management and 1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's our of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 B. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended b screw manufacturer for SPECIFICATIONS P Y eq P 9 9Po P Y P 9 9 9 9 Y a N Disposal." cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m)or material being fastened. O N B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. fraction thereof. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having E o C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70. o,; operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 033053 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ~ N A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or 0 N END OF SECTION 024119 rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin DRAWING NO: ¢a to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm). A" o" MW. y 2Q mo 1 2 3 1 4 1 2 3 4 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.2 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN FRAMED CONSTRUCTION SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 064000-INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK -CONTINUED FROM SHEET A9.1 A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to A. Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: PART 1 O- GENERAL OO O ssoe& those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one 1.1 SUMMARY 2.3 MICELLANEOUS MATERIALS 1. Shop Certification:AWI's Quality Certification Program accredited participant or WI's Certified length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. A. Section Includes: A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Compliance Program licensee. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. B. Anchors: Select material,type, size, and finish requrired for each substrate for secure anchorage. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS insulation and adjoining framing members. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install paneling until building is enclosed,wet-work is 3. Maintain 3-inch(76-mm)clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. elsewhere as requried for corrosion resistance. Proved toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled- complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels protected from contact with insulation. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) CONSULTANTS: in-place anchors. planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. 4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches(2438 mm), support unfaced A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include factory-finishing specifications. C. Adhesives, General: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. PART 2- PRODUCTS blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction D. Adhesives and Glues: Type 1 (waterproof). 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS studs. details not covered in Product Data; and the following: E. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate and Bonding Edges: As recommended by manufacturer of plastic A. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent 1. Dimensions and locations of blocking. laminate. 2.2 WOOD TRIM, GENERAL gaps in insulation using the following materials: 2. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the"Architectural Woodwork Standards"for 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a 3. Dimensions and locations of cutouts. A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Custom-grade interior woodwork grades of wood trim indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. density of approximately 2.5 Ib/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m). 4. Undercuts. complying with referenced quality standars. 1. Provide inspections of fabrication and installation together with labels and certificates from AWI 5. Requirements for veneer matching. B. Install laminated plastic in single pieces up to the limits of the sheet sizes; small patches will not be certification program indicating that woodwork complies with requirements of grades specified. END OF SECTION 072100 6. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. accepted. 2.3 WOOD TRIM FOR STAINED FINISH 7. Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. C. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture A. Wood Species: White oak, sawn/sliced. SECTION 081113-HOLLOW METAL FRAMES C. Samples: For factory-finished doors. content in realtion to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. B. Molding Patterns: PART 1 - GENERAL 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) D. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and detials indicated. 1. Crown Molding: species white oak stained per the finish legend. 1.1 SUMMARY A. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates:AWI Quality Certification or WI Certified Compliance Program C E. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application,to maximum extent possible a. Crown molding equal to Seneca Hardwood Lumber Company Molding Q: %" x 5 %"with A. Section includes: certificates. C before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. matching wood flat and quarter round trim to make coffered ceiling as show below. 1. Interior standard steel frames. PART 2- PRODUCTS Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 12 ACTION SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete. A. Product Data: For each type of product. A. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 2. Trail fit assemlies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install Bowes, 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) 2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL screw, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting.Verify A. Product test reports. A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A,"Architectural Wood that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements PART 2- PRODUCTS Flush Doors." indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. Provide AWI Quality Certification or WI Certified Compliance Labels indicating that doors comply with F. Shop-cut openings to maxium extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electical A. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Complying with NFPA 80 and listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency requirements of grades specified. work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1 Ipositive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2. Provide all blocking for coffered boxes. 1. Smoke-Control Assemblies: Provide assemblies with gaskets listed and labeled for smoke and draft C. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY. 2.5 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS C. Base molding equal to Baird Brothers white oak double ripple baseboard B209, 3/4"x 5-1/2"; paint wood control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 A. Grade: Custom. per the finish legend. according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. or UL 10C. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Frameless/Flush Overlay. B. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 1. Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated. C. AWI Construction Type: Type 1, multiple self-supporting units rigidly jointed together. 1. Outside Corner of trim: Shop prepare using mitered construction. Assemble, sand, and glue in shop if 2.2 INTERIOR STANDARD STEEL FRAMES 2. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. ,�,GG�D D. AWI Door and Drawer Front Style: Flush overlay. site conditions permit. A. Construct hollow-metal frames to comply with standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. �, ,' `A[C, E. Reveal: per the drawings. 2. Bevel edges at each doorway. locations, hardware reinforcement,tolerances, and clearances, and as specified. D. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke-control, based on testing according to + F. Adhesive type: Type 1 (waterproof). 2.4 MATERIALS B. Heavy-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2; SDI A250.4, Level B. UL 1784. ��� LOUISE M. f�'� G. Backing: 0.020 minimum material thickness. A. Materials, General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for 1. Frames: E. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors: W SCHLATTER % H. Spreader at base: 1/2"from wall. each quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated. a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch(1.3 mm). 1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10. a y I. Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011. B. Wood Moisture Content: 9 percent. b. Construction: Knocked down or Face welded(where indicated) a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 Ibf(3100 N). TOLEDOOH J. Materials: 1. Veneer-Faced Panel Products(Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1. 2. Doors: b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge:400 Ibf(1780 N). TOLEDO, OH Door/Drawer Thicknesses 2.5 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS a. Type: As indicated in the Door and Frame Schedule. F. Mineral-Core Doors: '5. ARI-11622 a. Back and sides: 1/2" A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Materials, General:Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use b. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm). 1. Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard G b. Fronts: 3/4" materials that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics c. Face: Uncoated, cold-rolled steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch(1.3 mm). and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated. 2. Cabinet Thicknesses specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing d. Edge Construction: Model 1, Full Flush. 2. Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in o/ (�j7p�r, �' �j} � a. Bottom: 3/4" agency. e. Core: Manufacturers standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane, doors of fire-protection ratings indicated as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. Aai / / b. Sides: 3/4" 1. Use treated materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard. Do not use polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core at manufacturer's discretion. 3. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-holding 09/02/2021 c. Wall Cabinet Tops: 3/4" materials that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. C. Extra-Heavy-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 3; SDI A250.4, Level A. Provide at X-Ray. capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. d. Sub-Tops: 1/2" 2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect 1. Frames: 2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH e. Backs: 3/8" finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. a. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch (1.3 mm). A. Interior Solid-Core Doors PROJECT INFORMATION. 3. Shelves: 3/4" 3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing b. Construction: Full profile welded 1. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces) K. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, agency in the form of removable paper label or imprint on surfaces that will be concealed from view 2.3 FRAME ANCHORS 2. Species: Select white birch Grade BKL. after installation. A. Jamb Anchors: 3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). L. Integral Bases of cabinets to be individual bases and doweled into cabinet sides. 2.6 INSTALLATION MATERIALS 1. Type:Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. M. Filler and scribes to be covered with vertical grade laminate. A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, Fire-retardant-treated suitable for performance level indicated. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Running match. T I GA R D OR N. Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to sub-front with mounting screws from softwood lumber, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. 2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors perjamb,with one additional anchor for frames with no floor 6. Core: Structural composite lumber or mineral core as required for fire rating. interior of body. B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches(610 mm)of frame height above 7 feet 7. Construction: Five or seven plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core,then entire unit is abrasive 1. Join sub-fronts, back, and sides,with glued dovetail joints. metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dip (2.1 m). planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 11 675 SW PACIFIC HWY. 2. Drawer box: 5-piece box of 5/8" IPB core melamine. galvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls. 3. Postinstalled Expansion Anchor: Minimum 3/8-inch-(9.5-mm-)diameter bolts with expansion shields 2.4 LIGHT FRAMES 2.6 SOLID-SURFACING -MATERIAL COUNTERTIOPS C. Installation Adhesive: Product recommended by panel fabricator for each substrate for secure anchorage. or inserts,with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer. A. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturers standard wood-veneered T I GA R D, OREGON 97 223 A. Countertop and back end splashes: Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 3 cm slab thickness. 2.7 FABRICATION B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor. noncombustible beads matching veneer species of door faces and approved for use in doors of fire- B. Edge: Eased edge. Provide 1/2 inch radius at all outside edges. A. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. C. Floor Anchors for Concrete Slabs with Underlayment: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire- C. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes as indicated on Finish Legend. B. Complete fabrication, including assembly, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site, allowing not less than 2-inch (51-mm) height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at top of protection rating indicated. D. Fabricate tops and component in one piece, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing- C. Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, underlayment. B. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048- material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. electrical work, and similar items. D. Material:ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel(CS), 04Z(12G)coating designation; mill phosphatized. inch-(1.2-mm-)thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; baked-enamel-or powder-coated finish; and approved for 2.7 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. A. Grade: Custom 2.8 SHOP FINISHING ASTM A 1011/A 1011M; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 2.5 FABRICATION B B. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGP. A. General: Finish paneling at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, 2.4 MATERIALS A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced B C. Grain Direction:Vertical on doors and drawers. and polishing until after installation. A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet:ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. D. Edge Treatment: 3mm t-edge PVC to match face material. Provide 1/2 inch radius atall outside counter B. General: Shop finish transparent-finished paneling at fabrication shop as specked in this Section. See applications. 1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors. edges. Section 099123"Interior Painting"for field finishing of opaque-finished paneling. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet:ASTM A 1011/A 1 01 1 M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B;free of scale, pitting, or B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. E. Core Material: Exterior-grade plywood. C. General: Drawings indicate paneling that is required to be shop finished. surface defects: pickled and oiled. C. Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors. F. Core Material at Sinks: Exterior-grade plywood. D. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding,filling countersunk C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-lip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. G. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate. fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing paneling, as applicable to D. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, 2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable H. Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate. each unit of work. fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow- requirements in Section 088000"Glazing." CLIENT INFORMATION: L Back and side splashes to be attached to countertop. 1. Backpriming: Apply two coats of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats,to concealed surfaces metal frames of type indicated. 2.6 FACTORY FINISHING PART 3- EXECUTION of paneling. E. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000"Glazing." A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including 3.1 PREPARATION E. Transparent Finish: 2.5 FABRICATION fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. 1. Grade: Custom. A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work 2. Finish: System- 12, water-based polyurethane. multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises, as requried, including removal of packing and backpriming. 3. Wash Coat for Closed-Grain Woods:Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed-grain joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames. B. Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish. 1 0 I 3.2 INSTALLATION wood before staining and finishing. 1. Provide countersunk,flat-or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless C. Transparent Finish: \� A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 of fabrication 4. Staining: per the Finish legend. otherwise indicated. 1. Grade: Custom. of type of woodwork involved. 5. Open Finish for Open-Grain Woods: Do not apply filler to open-grain woods. 2. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. 2. Finish: WDMA TR-4 conversion varnish or WDMA TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane B. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and F. Painted Finish: Keep holes clear during construction. 3. Sheen: Semigloss. plumb(including tops)to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. 1. Colors:As indicated on the Room Finish Legend. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. PART 3- EXECUTION AMERICAN FAMILY 1. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. 2. Sheen: Semigloss,46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. B. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and 3.1 INSTALLATION 2. Scribe and cut interior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. PART 3- EXECUTION electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100"Door Hardware." 3. Countersink fasteners, fill surface flush, and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. 3.1 INSTALLATION the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. B. Manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. CARE 4. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches(3mm in 2438mm)for level and plum. Install adjoining A. Before installation,condition paneling to humidity conditions in installation areas. 1. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. interior finish carpentry with 1/32 inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset. R Grade: Install wood trim to comply with quality standard grade of paneling to be installed. 2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal frames for hardware. 2. Install smoke-and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105. C. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with C. Install woodwork and trim level, plumb, true in line, and without distortion. Shim as required with concealed 2.6 STEEL FINISHES C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 3700 CAHA BA BEACH RD countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing shims. Install level and plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2400 mm). Install with no A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching more than 1/16 inch in 96-inch(1.6 mm in 2400-mm)vertical cup or bow and 1/8 inch in 96-inch(3 mm in 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard,fast-curing, lead-and chromate-free primer complying with BIRMINGHAM, A L final finish if transparent finish is indicated. 2400-mm) horizontal variation from a true plane. SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;compatible with substrate and END OF SECTION 081416 35242 D. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. D. Scribe and cut paneling to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. E. Anchor paneling to supporting substrate with concealed hardware. PART 3- EXECUTION Complete installations of hardware and accessory items as indicated. F. Complete finishing work specified in this Section to extent not completed at shop or before installation of 3.1 PREPARATION SECTION 084213-ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES CLIENT PROJECT NO. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. trim. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and PART 1 - GENERAL 2. Maintain veneer sequence matched of cabinets with transparent finish. dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth,flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up 1.1 SUMMARY 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. END OF SECTION 064214 factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed. A. Section Includes: E. Countertops:Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into B. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 1. Interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units. underside of countertop. 3.2 INSTALLATION 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturers SECTION 072100-THERMAL INSULATION A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Comply with SDI A250.11 A. Product Data: For each type of product. written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints PART 1 - GENERAL 1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 1.1 SUMMARY set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed 1. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers. 2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight A. Section Includes: Work. C. Samples: For each exposed finish required. line. 1. Glass-fiber blanket. a. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face D. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and 3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. 2. Mineral-wool blanket. joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. 4. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 7 Section"Joint 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) faces. Touch-up finishes. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) Sealants." A. Product Data: For each type of product. b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. A. Energy Performance Certificates: Where required, NFRC-certified energy performance values for each G. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill Nail holes with 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) 2. Fire-Rated Openings: Install frames according to NFPA 80. aluminum-framed entrance. matching filler where exposed. A. Product test reports. 3. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. B. Product test reports. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING B. Research reports. a. Floor anchors maybe set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstal led expansion C. Field quality-control reports. A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; PART 2- PRODUCTS anchors if so indicated and approved. D. Sample warranties. 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 4. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. A. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 5. Installation Tolerances:Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances: A. Maintenance data. NO. DATE SUBJECT A C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. 2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at door rabbet on a line 90 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A I REVISION OR ISSUE D. Protect countertop surfaces during construction with 30-mil protection paper or greater.Tape underside of A. Glass-Fiber Blanket, Unfaced: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. A. Installer Qualifications:An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by countertop at a minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm)o.c. indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel manufacturer. SSOE Architects, L.L.C. 2.3 MINERAL-WOOL BLANKETS to plane of wall. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated and accredited by 1001 Madison Avenue END OF SECTION 064000 A. Mineral-Wool Blanket, Unfaced:ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing);consisting of c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at opposite face corners of jambs on IAS or ILAC Mutual Recognition Arrangement as complyingwith ISO/IEC 17025. Toledo OH 43604 fibers; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 1.6 WARRANTY g g T. (419}255-3830 SECTION 064214-WOOD TRIM ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.6 mm), measured at jambs at floor. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrances o PART 1 - GENERAL 2.4 ACCESSORIES 3.3 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty PROJECT NO: 021 -01005-00 a. 1.1 SUMMARY A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and period. W A. Section Includes: 1. Glass-Fiber Insulation:ASTM C 764, Type II, loose fill; with maximum flame-spread and smoke- apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PROJECT MANAGER: M.ALFIERI ¢i 1. Wood trim. developed indexes of 5, per ASTM E 84. B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace DESIGNED: T. McMAHON o 2. Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing wood trim that are not concealed within B. Insulation Anchors, Spindles, and Standoffs:As recommended by manufacturer. Sections aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER o other construction. PART 3- EXECUTION 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. o 3. Shop finishing wood trim. 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL END OF SECTION 081113 DRAWING TITLE: o 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) A. Comply with insulation manufacturers written instructions applicable to products and applications. SECTION 084213 CONTINUED ON SHEET A9.3a 2 A .Product Data: For each type of product. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or SPECIFICATIONS 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by snow at any time. O treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and finish specified. insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. o D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths.Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to 0N make up total thickness or to achieve R-value. DRAWING NO: $i;zl 60) A9.2 2Q no 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 SECTION 084213-ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES -CONTINUED FROM SHEET A9.2 SECTION 087100-DOOR HARDWARE 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS O O ssoeo PART 1 - GENERAL A. Clear Annealed Float Glass:ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3. A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. O O PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1.1 SUMMARY B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT(fully tempered), Condition A(uncoated)unless 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Section Includes: otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear)or Class 2(tinted)as indicated, Quality-Q3. indicated. A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum- 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: C. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass:ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A 2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 framed entrances representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, a. Swinging doors. (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear)or Class 2 (tinted)as indicated, Quality-Q3. (Z120), hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) D. Pyrolytic-Coated, Low-Maintenance Glass: Clear float glass with a coating on first surface having both B. Studs and Tracks:ASTM C 645. CONSULTANTS: B. Structural Loads: Interior assembly shall withstand design loads within limits determined according to the A. Product Data: For each type of product. photocatalytic and hydrophilic properties that act to loosen dirt and to cause water to sheet evenly over the 1. Steel Studs and Tracks: International Building Code. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) glass instead of beading. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch (0.752 mm). C. Air Infiltration: Where required,test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows: A. Sample warranty. E. Reflective-Coated Vision Glass:ASTM C 1376. b. Depth:As indicated on Drawings. 1. Entrance Doors: 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) 2.4 INSULATING GLASS C. Slip-Type Head Joints:Where indicated, provide one of the following: a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. (5.08 Us per sq. m)at a static-air-pressure A. Maintenance data. A. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a 1. Single Long-Leg Track System: ASTM C 645 top track with 2-inch-(51-mm-)deep flanges in differential of 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190. thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top track and with b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. (2.54 Us per sq. m)at a static-air-pressure A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product 1. Sealing System: Dual seals. continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm)of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. differential of 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). manufacturers who is available during the course of the Work to consult Construction Manager about door hardware 2. Perimeter Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction. 2. Double-Track System:ASTM C 645 top outer tracks, inside track with 2-inch-(51-mm-)deep flange D. Energy Performance: Where required, certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows: and keying. 2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer track sized to friction- 1. Thermal Transmittance(U-factor): As indicated on drawings, fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U- 1.6 WARRANTY A. General: over inner track. factor as determined according to NFRC 100. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to inter r 2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient:As indicated on drawings, fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat workmanship within specified warranty period. products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for gain coefficient as determined according to NFRC 200. 1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise indicated. and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 3. Condensation Resistance: As indicated on drawings, fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC- PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers'written instructions for selecting glazing D. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement C certified condensation resistance rating as determined according to NFRC 500. 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less C E. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Where fire-rated doors are indicated, provide door hardware complying with NFPA 80 3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (1 00 deg C), material surfaces. that is listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. F. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C. Class 100/50, Use NT. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch (0.752 mm). 2.2 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS B. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Where smoke-control door assemblies are required, provide door hardware that C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch(1.367-mm) minimum base-metal thickness,with A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturers standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. complies with requirements of assemblies tested according to UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. Class 50, Use NT. minimum 1/2-inch-(13-mm-)wide flanges. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm)overall thickness,with minimum 0.125-inch-(3.2-mm-)thick, C. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 Ibf(67 N)to release the latch. Locks do not require use D. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten comers with reinforcing brackets that of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. Class 25, Use NT. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches(38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch-(1.72-mm-)thick, are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. D. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with agency having jurisdiction 2.6 GLAZING TAPES galvanized steel. 2. Door Design:As indicated on drawings. and as indicated on Drawings. A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels:ASTM C 645. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. E. Provide products for each door that comply with requirements indicated in Part 2 and door hardware schedule. nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces;with or without spacer rod as 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch (0.752 mm) B. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum, minimum 0.125 inch (3.2 mm)thick and 1. Door hardware is scheduled on Drawings. recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY: reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 2.2 LOCK CYLINDERS ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below: H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-(13-mm-)deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound 1. Nominal Size:As indicated on Drawings. A. Construction Master Keys: Provide cylinders with feature that permits voiding of construction keys without cylinder 1. AAMA 804.3 tape,where indicated. transmission. C. Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral,where removal. Provide 10 construction master keys. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped. framing abuts adjacent construction. B. Construction Cores: Provide construction cores that are replaceable by permanent cores. Provide 10 construction 3. AAMA 807.3 tape,for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure. I. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness,with minimum 1/2-inch- D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturers standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous master keys. B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes;factory coated with adhesive on both (13-mm-)wide flanges. ,�$D ARC shims for aligning system components. 2.3 KEYING surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. Depth:As indicated on Drawings. �'S +$j E. Materials: A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, appendix. Provide as indicated on 1. AAMA 810.1,Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Furring Brackets:Adjustable, corrugated-edge-type steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel � LOUISE M. `�' 1. Aluminum:Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. Drawings. 2. AAMA 810.1,Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of thickness of 0.0329 inch (0.8 mm). �i V� a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209(ASTM B 209M). B. Keys: Nickel silver or Brass. liquid sealant. 3. Tie Wire:ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-(1.59-mm-)diameter SCHLATTER 0 b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes:ASTM B 221 ASTM B 221 M . 1. Stamping: Permanent) inscribe each key with a visual key control number and include the following notation: 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- 1.21-mm- diameter wire. H ( ) P 9� Y Y Y 9 ( ) c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes:ASTM B 429/B 429M. a. Notation: "DO NOT DUPLICATE." A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers:Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. J. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches(32 mm),wall attachment • TOLEDO,OH d. Structural Profiles:ASTM B 308/B 308M. 2.4 FINISHES B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch(0.455 mm), and depth ARI-11622 "$ 2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC- A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated indoor hardware schedule. C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to required to fit insulation thickness indicated. I �0 PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface PART 3- EXECUTION maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS '�' F preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to 3.1 INSTALLATION D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement(side walking). A. Tie Wire:ASTM A 641/A 641 M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-(1.59-mm-)diameter wire, /,j[J�) �/] r applicable SSPC standard. A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights required to comply with governing regulations. E. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to or double strand of 0.048-inch-(1.21-mm-)diameter wire. �'m fs� /!/• 919 a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars:ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturers written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 09/02/2021 b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate PART 3- EXECUTION 1. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted 3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC193 or AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. 2.3 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing a. Uses: Securing hangers to structure. PROJECT INFORMATION A. Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 087100"Door Hardware." C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing b. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with B. General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in"Entrance Door Hardware recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches (750 mm)of door height, publications. ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated Sets"Article for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section. whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project C. Wire Hangers:ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter. 1. Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named provided. site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch (25 by 5 mm) by length indicated. manufacturers' products. D. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and areas during construction period. imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. E. Carrying Channels (Main Runners): Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 2. Opening-Force Requirements: 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Construction Manager, C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction 0.0538 inch (1.367 mm)and minimum 1/2-inch-(13-mm-)wide flanges. T I GA R D , OR a. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 Ibf(22.2 N)to fully open door. 3.2 ADJUSTING testing. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. C. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function,finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of A. Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, F. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 11 675 SW PACIFIC HWY. entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets"Article. Products are identified by using unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.367-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-(1 - entrance door hardware designations as follows: operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. for heel bead. mm-)wide flanges, 3/4 inch(19 mm)deep. T I GA R D, OREGON 97223 1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door hardware E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 2. Steel Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645. type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in END OF SECTION 087100 F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm). a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch(0.752 mm) "Entrance Door Hardware Sets"Article. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing b. Depth:As indicated on Drawings 2.4 GLAZING SECTION 088000-GLAZING channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced 3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels:ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch(22 mm)deep. A. Glazing: Comply with Section 088000"Glazing." PART 1 - GENERAL glazing publications. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch(0.752 mm) B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilient elastomeric 1.1 SUMMARY 3.2 TAPE GLAZING 4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch-(13-mm-)deep members designed to reduce sound glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers. A. Section includes: A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that,when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or transmission. B C. Glazing Sealants:As recommended by manufacturer. 1. Glass for windows, doors and storefront framing. protrude slightly above sightline of stops. a. Configuration:Asymmetrical or hat shaped. 2.5 FABRICATION 2. Glazing sealants and accessories. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS B A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. 1.2 COORDINATION fit opening. A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first,then to jambs. Cover horizontal 1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. adequate sealant thicknesses,with reasonable tolerances. framing joints by applying tapes to jambs,then to heads and sills. properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. C. Fabricate components that,when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. A. Product Data: For each type of product. tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M,Type I(No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches (300 mm) square. E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. 2. Foam Gasket:Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)thick, in width to suit steel stud size. CLIENT INFORMATION 4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket PART 3 - EXECUTION edge clearances. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL 5. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. A. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report. G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. A. Installation Standard:ASTM C 754. D. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies:Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing O entrance door hardware. A. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications:An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with installation. E. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. the testing indicated. allowance for stretch during installation. B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line,with connections securely fastened. F. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, 1.6 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab ba , drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, miter cut and bonded together at corners. toilet accessories,furnishings, or similar construction. G. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES 1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame A. Clear Anodic Finish:AAMA 611,AA-M12C22A31, Class Il, 0.010 mm or thicker. materials matching those submitted. place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of both sides of joints independently. AMERICAN FAMILY B. Color Anodic Finish:AAMA 611,AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class Il, 0.010 mm or thicker. 1.7 WARRANTY openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. 3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES 1. Color:As indicated on Drawings. A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings requir d CARE C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish:AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.04 deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly by referenced installation standards for assembly types. mm). use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturers against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, 1. Color and Gloss:As indicated on Drawings. written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. 3700 CA HA BA BEACH RD PART 3- EXECUTION 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. BIRMINGHAM AL 3.1 INSTALLATION B. Manufacturers Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that manufacturer. D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or A. General: deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended 1. Comply with manufacturers written instructions. normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to 3.4 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling. 35242 2. Do not install damaged components. manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and 1. Slip-Type Head Joints:Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce 3. Fd joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. surfaces of glass. glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. CLIENT PROJECT NO. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration and to PART 2- PRODUCTS position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. section (for cripple studs)at head and secure to jamb studs. prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. 6. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000"Quality Requirements," to glass and channel surfaces. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud,with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm) B. Metal Protection: to design glazing. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact B. Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand design loads within limits and under conditions indicated determined 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or installing nonconductive spacers. according to the International Building Code and ASTM E 1300. A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. structure. 2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact C. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category 11. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door surfaces with bituminous paint. D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing require C. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed to produce weathertight installation per manufacturers' manufacturers published test data, based on procedures indicated below: during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. above door heads. recommendation. 1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly D. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades. program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F(W/sq. m x K). substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid E. Install glazing as specified in Section 088000"Glazing." 2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings. structure. F. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated 1. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to 3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. assembly indicated. entrance door hardware manufacturers'written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent E. Sustainable Design Requirements:As indicated on drawings. END OF SECTION 088000 5. Sound-Rated Partftions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. possible. 2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL E. Z-Shaped Furring Members: 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations SECTION 092216-NONSTRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 1. Erect insulation where indicated, specified in Section 072100"Thermal Insulation,"vertically and hot A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise PART 1 - GENERAL in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm)o.c. I NO.1 DATE SUBJECT A B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on aluminum-framed entrances. defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1.1 SUMMARY 2. Except at exterior comers, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete A I REVISION OR ISSUE 1. Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect shall be 1. GANA Publications: "Glazing Manual." A. Section Includes: stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration. 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. (610 mm)o.c. SSOE Architects, L.L.C. C. Aluminum-framed entrances will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffds. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond1001 Madison Avenue D. Prepare test and inspection reports. B. Safety Glazing Labeling:Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached Toledo OH 43604 SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction or manufacturer. Label shall indicate A. Product Data: For each a of product. channel.At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches 305 mm from corner T. (419)255-3830 9 Y P 9 j type P P ( ) END OF SECTION 084213 manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) and cut insulation to fit. '2 C. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of A. Product Certificates: For each type of code-compliance certification for studs and tracks. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 PROJECT NO: 021 -01005-00 a units with appropriate certification label of IGCC. B. Evaluation reports for firestop tracks, post-installed anchors, and power-actuated fasteners. mm)from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. w D. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE PROJECT MANAGER: M.ALFIERI Q requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated. A. Code-Compliance Certification of Studs and Tracks: Provide documentation that framing members are SECTION 092216 CONTINUED ON SHEET A9.4 DESIGNED: T. McMAHON o E. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened float glass, or fully certified according to the product-certification program of the Certified Steel Stud Association, the Steel CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER 0 tempered float glass as needed to comply with"Performance Requirements"Article. Where heat-strengthened float Framing Industry Association, or the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association. o glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with PART 2- PRODUCTS DRAWING TITLE: o "Performance Requirements"Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass. 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS N M A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load- SPECIFICATIONS a< bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, O Cn according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. o a B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those M � tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according toi=ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. LL N C. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. DRAWING NO: ¢a A9.3 �w 2Q Fn 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 SECTION 092216-NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING-CONTINUED FROM SHEET A9.3 2.8 AUXILIARY MATERIALS PART 3-EXECUTION SECTION 096513-RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES O O ssoeo A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturers 3.1 EXAMINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 3.3 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS written instructions. A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance 1. SUMMARY A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. A. Section Includes: required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. continuous substrate. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean;free of coatings that are incompatible with tile- 1. Installation of Owner Provided Vinyl Base. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. setting materials, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap,wax, oil, or silicone; 2.Vinyl molding accessories. CONSULTANTS: prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSIA108.01 for installations indicated. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm)thick. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar comply with surface finish A. Product Data: For each type of product, being provided. 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel requirements in ANSIA108.01 for installations indicated. B. Maintenance data for close out booklet. not part of supporting structural or suspension system. manufacturer. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PART 2-PRODUCTS a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by D. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing)produced by 3.2 PREPARATION 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thinset mortar with A. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. 2.2 VINYL BASE (VB-1) interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install E. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that A. Owner Provided Material (For Reference and Coordination with GC Installation) supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings complies with ANSIA108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot(1:50)toward drains. 1. See Finish Legend on Sheet A1.4. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 3.3 CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, TypeTV(vinyl, thermoplastic). limits established by referenced installation standards. F. Thermal Insulation:As specified in Section 072100"Thermal Insulation." A. Comply with TCNA's"Handbook for Ceramic, Glass, and Stone Tile Installation"for TCNA installation 1. Type TV(thermoplastic vinyl). 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or G. Vapor Retarder:As specified in Section 072600"Vapor Retarders." methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSIA108 series"Specifications for 2. Style and Location: other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause PART 3- EXECUTION Installation of Ceramic Tile"that are referenced in TCNA installation methods, specified in tile installation a. StyleB, Cove. C hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch(3.2 mm). 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye A. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSIA108 series of tile installation standards for D. Height: 4 inches (102 mm). C screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a B. Comply with ASTM C 840. providing 95 percent mortar coverage: E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide a. Tile floors in wet areas. 2.3 VINYL MOLDING ACCESSORY(TSI) 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 1/4-to 1/2-inch-(6.4-to 12.7-mm-)wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges b. Tile floors consisting of tiles 8 by 8 inches (200 by 200 mm)or larger. A. Owner Provided Material (For Reference and Coordination with GC Installation). 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. c. Tile floors consisting of rib-backed tiles. B. Description: Vinyl cap for cove of resilient floor covering and cove filler strip, nosing for resilient floor forms. D. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without covering, reducer stripttransition strips for resilient floor covering. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturers written instructions. interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without C. Profile and Dimensions: for ADA transitions between materials. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. E. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas. disrupting pattern or joint alignments. 2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to C.Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support. receive tape. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet(3 mm in 3.6 m) G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. applications indicated. measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where required for fire-resistance rated D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY. will receive finishes. assemblies land sound rated assemblies. E. Where accent tile differs in thickness from field tile, vary setting bed thickness so that tiles are flush. substrate conditions indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. F. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in PART 3 -EXECUTION END OF SECTION 092216 3. Level 4:At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are 3.1 PREPARATION 4. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings. less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient ��OD ARC SECTION 092900-GYPSUM BOARD H. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use as G. Joint Widths: products. PART 1 - GENERAL exposed soffit board. 1. Per the manufacturers written installation guidelines. B. Concrete Substrates Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM F710. 5� f ' 1.1 SUMMARY I. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and 1.Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 0 LOUISE M. 11� A. Section Includes: J. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions. isolation joints,where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that W SCHLATTER n 1. Interior gypsum board. 3.2 PROTECTION not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. contain soap,wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not 1:4 "q 2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits. A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation,direct sunlight, construction, and 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. use solvents. • TOLEDO,OH 3. Tile backing panels. other causes during remainder of the construction period. I. Metal Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated. 3.Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. J. Floor Sealer:Apply floor sealer to grout joints in tile floors according to flooring manufacturer's written installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended by manufacturer '5�� AM-11622 �, A. Product Data: For each type of product. instructions. As soon as floor sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from file in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH. PART 2- PRODUCTS END OF SECTION 092900 faces by wiping with soft cloth. 4. Moisture/Relative Humidity Testing: as recommended by manufacturer. (, F���(t Gu-! !Gr 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS K. Install tile backing panels and treat joints according to ANSIA108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove �//J `�c A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction SECTION 093013-TILING for type of application indicated. Use modified dry-set mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. �"' 02/2021 identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. PART 1 -GENERAL manufacturers written instructions. D. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be 09� B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those 1.1 SUMMARY L. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSIA108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce installed. tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent A. Section Includes: waterproof membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. E. Immediately before installation, clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. testing agency. 1. Installation of owner provided tile. M. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSIA108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to 3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION PROJECT INFORMATION C. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 2. Waterproof membrane or thin-set applications. produce membrane of uniform thickness that is bonded securely to substrate. A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL 3. Metal edge strips. 3.4 INTERIOR CERAMIC TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond 1.2 SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor: permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. with support system indicated. A. Product Data: For each type of product being provided. 1. Ceramic Tile Installation TCNAF113; thinset mortar. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces T I GA R D O R 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD B.Virtual sample showing corresponding paint code number of each type of product being provided with a. Ceramic Tile Type: (CT1) aligned. A. Gypsum Wallboard:ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. corresponding Finish Legend code. b. Thinset Mortar: Standard dry-set or modified dry-set mortar. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece,with base in continuous contact 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE c. Grout:AFC GROUT-SEE FINISH LEGEND ON SHEET A1.4. with horizontal and vertical substrates. 11 675 SW PACIFIC HWY. 2. Long Edges: Tapered A. Installer Qualifications: B. Interior Wall Installations, Wood or Metal Studs or Furring: E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Installer is a five-star member of the National Tile Contractors Association. 1. Ceramic Tile Installation: F. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. T I GA R D, OREGON 97223 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch(15.9 mm). PART 2-PRODUCTS a. TCNAW244C or TCNAW244F;thinset mortar on Cementitious backer units or fiber-cement backer G. Job-Formed Corners: 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS board. 1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than C. Gypsum Ceiling Board:ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. A. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. b. Ceramic Tile Type: (CT1). 3 inches(76 mm) in length. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch(12.7 mm). 2.2 PRODUCTS, GENERAL c. Thinset Mortar: Standard dry-set or modified dry-set mortar. a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. A.ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSIA108.02, ANSI d. Grout:AFC GROUT SEE FINISH LEGEND ON SHEET A1.4. 3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION D. Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture-and mold-resistant core and paper standards referenced in other Part2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCNA installation methods END OF SECTION 093013 A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories. surfaces. specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified. B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout B 1. Core: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type and 5/8 inch(15.9 mm), Type X. B. Meets ASTM E84, Class A. Meets NFPA 255 Class I. SECTION 095113-ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.3 TILE PRODUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION B 3. Mold Resistance:ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. A. Owner Provided Materials (for reference and coordination with GC Installation) 1.1 SUMMARY A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. 2.4 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS 1. Porcelain Tile Type(CT1): See Finish Legend on Sheet A1.4 A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings. B. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion. A. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Face Size: 12 inches by 24 inches. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) END OF SECTION 096513 1. Core:5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Face Size Variation: Rectified. A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with fiberglass mat laminated to both sides 3. Thickness: 10.5 mm. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. SECTION 096516-RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING and with manufacturer's standard edges. 4. Face: Plain with square or cushion edges. C. For close-out booklet provide Maintenance data. PART 1 -GENERAL 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 5. Grout Color and Style: As indicated on the Room Finish Legend. PART 2- PRODUCTS 1.1 SUMMARY CLIENT INFORMATION. 2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS 2.4 THRESHOLDS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Section Includes: A. Glass-Mat,Water-Resistant Backing Board:ASTM C 1178/C 1178M,with manufacturer's standard edges. A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition as listed above between A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000"Quality 1. Installation of Owner provided vinyl sheet flooring. 1. Core: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm), regular type and 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. adjacent floor finishes. Requirements,"to design seismic restraints for ceiling systems. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) 2. Mold Resistance:ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch (1.5 mm)above B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84;testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify A. Product Data: For each type of product being provided. �� B. Cementitious Backer Units:ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or ASTM C 1325,with manufacturer's standard adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. B. Samples: For each exposed product being provided and for each color, texture, and pattern specified. ( ) edges. (12.7 mm)or less above adjacent floor surface. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264. C. Maintenance data for close out booklet. \�J 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch(15.9 mm) 2.5 TILE BACKING PANELS 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2. Mold Resistance:ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. A. Cementitious Backer Units: See Gypsum Board specification. C. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. A. Installer Qualifications:An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are competent in techniques 2.6 TRIM ACCESSORIES 2.6 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE 2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS required by manufacturer for resilient sheet flooring installation and seaming method indicated. A. Interior Trim:ASTM C 1047. A. General: Manufacturers standard product, that complies with ANSIA118.10 and is recommended by the A. Product: 1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this Project who are trained or certified by resilient sheet 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Dune Tegular#1774. flooring manufacturer for installation techniques required. AMERICAN FAMILY sheet. manufacturer. B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 1264. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2. Shapes: B. Polyethylene Sheet: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing; 0.008-inch (0.2-mm) nominal C. Classification: Type III, Form 2 Pattern C E. 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS CARE a. Cornerbead. thickness. D. Color: White. A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient sheet flooring, as determined by testing identical b. Bullnose bead. 1. Products:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: E. Light Reflectance(LR): 0.83. products according to ASTM E648 or NFPA253 by a qualified testing agency. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. a. Schluter Systems L.P; KERDI. F. Ceiling Attenuation Class(CAC): 35. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45W/sq. cm. 3700 CA HA BA BEACH RD d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. C. Latex-Portland Cement Waterproof Mortar: Flexible, waterproof mortar consisting of cement-based mix G. Noise Reduction Coefficient(NRC): 0.50. B. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. and latex additive. H. Edge/Joint Detail:Angled tegular edge. 2.2 VINYL SHEET FLOORING (SV1) BIRMINGHAM, A L f. Expansion (control)joint. 1. Product:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: I. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15 mm). A. Product: Owner Provided Material See Finish Legend on A1.4 B. Exterior Trim:ASTM C 1047. a. ARDEX Americas;ARDEX 8+9TM Rapid Waterproofing and Crack Isolation Compound. J. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm). B. Product Standard:ASTM F 1913. 35242 1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, plastic, or rolled zinc. b. Or products equal and listed in manufacturer's written instructions. 2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM C. Thickness: 0.080 inch (2.0 mm). 2. Shapes: 2.7 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: D. Wearing Surface: Smooth. a. Cornerbead. A. General: Manufacturers standard product that complies with ANSIA118.12 for standard performance and 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc;Armstrong Prelude 15/16". E. Sheet Width:6 feet 6 inches. CLIENT PROJECT NO b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and F. Seamless-Installation Method: Heat welded. c. Expansion (Control)Joint: One-piece, rolled zinc with V-shaped slot and removable strip covering recommended by manufacturer. accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M. G. Description:An unbacked, non-layered, homogeneous sheet vinyl flooring. Protected by a diamond-infused slot opening. B. Polyethylene Sheet: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing; 0.008-inch (0.2-mm) nominal C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold- UV-cured polyurethane finish, the colors and pattern detail are dispersed uniformly throughout the 2.7 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS thickness. rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 (Z90)coating designation; thickness of the product. Color pigments are insoluble in water and resistant to cleaning agents and light. A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. 1. Products:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: with prefinished 15/16-inch-(24-mm-)wide metal caps on flanges. H. Homogeneous sheet flooring shall conform to the requirements of ASTM F1913 Standard Specification B. Joint Tape: a. Schluter Systems L.P; KERDI. 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. C. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override(stepped)or butt-edge type. 2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 1. Products:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 3. Face Design: Flat,flush. A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. a. LATICRETE SUPERCAP, LLC; Laticrete Hydro Barrier. 4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel or aluminum. hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer for 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. D. Latex-Portland Cement Crack-Resistant Mortar: Flexible mortar consisting of cement-based mix and latex 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. applications indicated. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other additive. 2.4 ACCESSORIES B. Adhesives: Owner Provider,AFC SHEET ADHESIVE-258DE (For Reference and Coordination with GC compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Products:Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Installation.) 1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. a.ARDEX Americas; ARDEX 8+9T Rapid Waterproofing and Crack Isolation Compound. Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. C. Seamless-Installation Accessories: 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints,fasteners, and trim flanges, use 2.8 SETTING MATERIALS B. Hold-Down Clips: Manufacturer's standard hold-down at vestibules. 1. Heat-Welding Bead: Manufacturer's solid-strand product for heat welding seams. setting-type taping compound. A. Portland Cement Mortar(Thickset) Installation Materials:ANSIA108.02. 2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM a. Colors to: match flooring. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. B. Standard Dry-Set Mortar(Thinset):ANSIA118.1. A. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, D. Integral-Flash-Cove-Base Accessories (covered under 096513 and/or manufacturers approved products): 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 1. Products:(Owner Provided Material, For Reference and Coordination with GC Installation), manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; 1. Cove Strip: 1-inch (25-mm) radius provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. a.AFC PORCELAIN ADHESIVE 261 DE/COLOR 500. formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension- 2. Cap Strip: 1/8"vinyl provided or approved by resilient sheet flooring manufacturer. I NO. DATE I SUBJECT A 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use drying-type, all-purpose compound 2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix to which only water must be added at Project site. system runners. 3. Comers: Metal inside and outside corners and end stops provided or approved by resilient sheet D. Joint Compound for Exterior Applications: 3. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with liquid-latex additive at Project site. PART 3- EXECUTION flooring manufacturer. A REVISION OR ISSUE 1. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping 4. For wall applications, provide non-sagging mortar. 3.1 PREPARATION 4. Provide 6" High. SSOE Architects, L.L.C. compound. 2.9 GROUT MATERIALS A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite E. Provide approved seam adhesive for sealing joints between the top of wall base or integral cove cap and 1001 Madison Avenue 2. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: As recommended by sheathing board manufacturer. A. Unsanded-Portland Cement Grout: ANSIA108.10, consisting of white or gray cement and white or colored edges of each ceiling.Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated. irregular wall surfaces such as masonry, provide plastic filler applied according to the manufacturers Toledo OH 43604 E. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: aggregate as required to produce color indicated. B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items. recommendations. T. (419) 255-3830 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel:As recommended by backing panel manufacturer. B. High-Performance Tile Grout:ANSIA118.7. 3.2 INSTALLATION z 2. Cementitious Backer Units:As recommended by backer unit manufacturer. 1. Products:(Owner Provided Material, For Reference and Coordination with GC Installation). A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according to ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturers written instructions. SECTION 096516 CONTINUED ON SHEET A9.5PROJECT NO: O200 0- a.AFC Grout See Finish Legend on Sheet A1.4. B. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to -O005- b. Grout line thickness: 1/8 inch. conceal edges of acoustical panels. PROJECT MANAGER: M.ALFIERI 2 2. Polymer Type: Dry, redispersible forth, prepackaged with other dry ingredients. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before DESIGNED: T. McMAHON oI 3. Polymer Type: Liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. they are installed. o 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS 2. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER o A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation 3. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows: 0 provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans. DRAWING TITLE: o B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metal and designed 4. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated; space according to panel manufacturer's written instructions S PEC I F I CATI O N S " a specifically for flooring and wall applications. unless otherwise indicated. a A 1. Schluter Systems L.PReno-U transition(TS2) and jolly edge if option is selected. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL a C6 2. Provide Schutter System DILEX-AHKA cove base where floor tile meets base and Schluter Systems A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform inspections. m q Schiene at top to tile and all exposed edges. I. Periodic inspection during the installation of suspended ceiling grids according to ASCE/SEI 7. 3. Finish Satin anodized aluminum 00 C. Floor Sealer: Manufacturers standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or END OF SECTION 095113 LL N appearance of grout. DRAWING NO ¢a 6 as A9.4 �w 2Q 1 1 2 3 1 4 m 0 1 2 3 4 SECTION 096516-RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING-CONTINUED FROM SHEET A9.4 3.2 PREPARATION 3.3 INSTALLATION 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL O O ssoeo A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of A. Installation Method: Tactile or equal no glue installations; according to manufacturer's recommendations if approved by A. Material Compatibility: O O PART 3-EXECUTION resilient products. Owner. 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and 3.1 PREPARATION B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F710. B. Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturers written installation instructions for the following: substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer. A. Prepare substrates according to resilient sheet flooring manufacturers written instructions to ensure 1.Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 1. Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down Installation." based on testing and field experience. adhesion of resilient sheet flooring. 2.Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed C. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F710. with installation only after substrates pass testing. uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. No seams in doorways or thresholds, traffic areas, or main aisle ways. topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. 1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 3. Moisture Testing D. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. B. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with CONSULTANTS 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test,ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after E. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base,when calculated contain soap,wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by resilient sheet substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 5 Ib of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24)and the following chemical restrictions; these flooring manufacturer. Do not use solvents. b. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates F. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and requirements do not apply to primers or finishes that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by resilient sheet flooring pass testing. similar openings. 1. Flat Paints and Coatings:VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH C. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain G. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings:VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. scale recommended by manufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 lbs./1000 sq. ft./24 hrs for soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. 3. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total standard adhesive; provide high-moisture adhesive (approved by manufacturer)for slab with D. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. H. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned Carpet Installations"and with aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). greater moisture. E. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours carpet manufacturer's written recommendations. 4. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests so that each test area does not exceed 200 sq.ft. (18.6 sq.m)] in advance of installation. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING a. Acrolein. (1000 sq. ft. (304.8 sq.m), and perform no fewer than three tests in each installation area and 1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: b. Acrylonitrile. with test areas evenly spaced in installation areas. installed. 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet c. Antimony. a.Anhydrous Calcium Chloride Test:ASTM F1869. Proceed with installation only after F. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. manufacturer. d. Benzene. substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 Ib of water/1000 sq. ft. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. C (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq.m) in 24 hours. only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element. f. Cadmium. C b. Relative Humidity Test: Using in-situ probes,ASTM F2170. Proceed with installation only 3.3 TILE INSTALLATION B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16,"Protection of Indoor Installations" g. Di(2-ethylhexyl)phthalate. after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humdity level measurement. A. Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer and I. Di-n-octyl phthalate. remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. one-half tile at perimeter. carpet adhesive manufacturer. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. D. Do not install resilient sheet flooring until materials are the same temperature as space where they 1. Lay tiles(as recommended by manufacturer). k. Diethyl phthalate. are to be installed. B. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured END OF SECTION 096813 I. Dimethyl phthalate. 1.At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move flooring and installation materials into spaces and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. m. Ethylbenzene. where they will be installed. 1. Lay tiles(as recommended by manufacturer). SECTION 097200-WALL COVERINGS n. Formaldehyde. E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient sheet C. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built- PART 1 - GENERAL o. Hexavalent chromium. flooring. in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames,thresholds, and nosings. 1.1 SUMMARY p. Isophorone. 3.2 RESILIENT SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION D. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. A. Section Includes: q. Lead. SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY. A. Comply with manufacturers written instructions for installing resilient sheet flooring. E. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating 1. Cork wall covering. r. Mercury. B. Unroll resilient sheet flooring and allow it to stabilize before cutting and fitting. on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) s. Methyl ethyl ketone. C. Lay out resilient sheet flooring as follows. F. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain A. Product Data: For each type of product. I. Methyl isobutyl ketone. 1. Maintain uniformity of flooring direction. overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile installed on covers. Tightly adhere tile edges to B. Samples: For each type of wall covering and for each color, pattern,texture, and finish specified, full width by 6-inch long u. Methylene chloride. D d � 2. Minimize number of seams, place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6 substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. in size. v. Naphthalene. `K inches (152 mm)away from parallel joints in flooring substrates. G. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a C. Maintenance data for close out booklet. w. Toluene(methylbenzene). �`S� ARC, 3. Match edges of flooring for color shading at seams. completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,telegraphing of adhesive PART 2- PRODUCTS x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. Ui~ LOUISE M. l' 4. Avoid cross seams. spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS y. Vinyl chloride. C( D. Scribe and cut resilient sheet flooring to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with identical adhesives to C. Colors: As indicated on the Room Finish Legend. a SCHLATIER (] fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinents, pipes, outlets and door frames. A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings 2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS y E. Extend resilient sheet flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. of applicable testing agency. A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI#50. ' TOLEDO,OH F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. ARI-11622 �$ repeating on resilient sheet flooring as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. B. Interior Alkyd Primer/Sealer: MPI#45. .� G marking device. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25> or less. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. G. Install resilient sheet flooring on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in B. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. C. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint systems /�j7Q�F � c &4er' installation areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of flooring and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods c. Class B indicated. ��{(.oycf installed on covers and adjoining flooring. Tightly adhere flooring edges to substrates that abut recommended in writing by the manufacturers written instructions. 2. Fire-Growth Contribution: No flashover and heat and smoke release according to NFPA 265. 2.4 METAL PRIMERS 09/02/2021 covers and to cover perimeters. B. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. A. Rust-Inhibitive Primer(Water Based): MPI#107. H. Adhere resilient sheet flooring to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to SECTION 096813-TILE CARPETING 2.2 VINYL WALL COVERING (CORK) 1. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2. produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, PART 1 - GENERAL A. Product: Walltalkers Tac-wall Uni-color resilient homogeneous tackable linoleum surface consisting of linseed oil, B. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI#134. PROJECT INFORMATION: telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. 1.1 SUMMARY granulated cork, rosin binders, and dry pigments calendered onto natural burlap backing. Color shall extend through thickness 1. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2. I. Seamless Installation: A. Section includes installation of Ownder provided modular carpet tile. of material. 2.5 LATEX PAINTS 1. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM Ft 516. Rout joints and heat weld with welding bead 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) a. Adhesive: Provide solvent-free, SBR type linoleum adhesive A. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex(Flat): MPI#143 (Gloss Level 1). to fuse sections permanently into a seamless flooring installation. Prepare,weld,and finish A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Width: 48 inches. 1. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4. seams to produce surfaces flush with adjoining flooring surfaces. 1. Include manufacturers written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. C. Color:As indicated on the Room Finish Legend. B. Institutional Low-Odor1VOC Latex(Low Sheen): MPI#144(Gloss Level 2). T I GA R D O R J. Integral-Flash-Cove Base: Cove resilient sheet flooring 6 inches (152 mm) up vertical surfaces. 2. Include manufacturers written installation recommendations for each type of substrate. D. Gauge: 1/4 inch (6 millimeter). 1. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 4.5. f Support flooring at horizontal and vertical junction with cove strip. Butt at top against cap strip. B. For close-out booklet provide Maintenance data. E. Install with j-trim at all exposed edges; clear anodized aluminum ''%inch (6 millimeter)trim. C. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex(Semigloss): MPI#147(Gloss Level 5). 1. Install metal corners at inside and outside corners. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 2.3 ACCESSORIES 1. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 3. 11 675 SW PACIFIC H WY. A. Installer Qualifications:An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering A. Install per the manufacturers written instructions. PART 3- EXECUTION END OF SECTION 096516 Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. B. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, non-staining adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application indicated 3.1 EXAMINATION TI GARD, OREGON 97223 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING and as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer. A. Examine substrates and conditions,with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for SECTION 096519-RESILIENT TILE FLOORING A. Comply with CRI's"CRI Carpet Installation Standard." PART 3- EXECUTION maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work. PART 1 -GENERAL 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS 3.1 PREPARATION B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1.1 SUMMARY A. Comply with CRI's"CRI Carpet Installation Standard"for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation. 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. A. Installation of Owner Provided Luxury Vinyl Tile B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil,grease, mold, mildew, and C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and 1.2 SUBMITTALS wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained incompatible primers. primers. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) at levels planned for building occupants during the remainder of the construction period. C. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. B A. Product Data: For each type of product being provided. C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with and defects. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. B 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. D. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items. 3.2 PREPARATION Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products identical to those tested for fire-exposure D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install E. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours A. Comply with manufacturers written instructions and recommendations in"MPI Architectural Painting behavior per test method indicated by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities carpet tiles before installing these items. before installation. Specification Manual"applicable to substrates indicated. having jurisdiction. 1.6 WARRANTY 3.2 WALL-COVERING INSTALLATION B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. A. Comply with covering manufacturers'written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated. removal is impractical or impassible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, PART 2- PRODUCTS B. Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without overlaps or gaps before surface preparation and painting. with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS between strips. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that CLIENT INFORMATION less than 65 degF (13 degC)or more than 85 degF(29.4 degC)with a relative humidity A. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. C. Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects. were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. between 405 and 60%. Store tiles on flat surfaces. 2.2 CARPET TILE(WCPT) D. Remove excess adhesive at seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 1. Shaw Contract Group: a Berkshire Hathaway company; Welcome Tile 11. E. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items to be flush performance rating, or nomenclature plates. A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 A. Colors and Patterns:As indicated on the Room Finish Legend. with finish surface. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and degF (13 degC)or more than 85 degF (29.4 degC)with a relative humidity between 405 and 60%in B. Fiber Type: 100%solution dyed, needlebond hair tile.. incompatible paints and encapsulates. spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: C. Surface Pile Weight: 49.0 oz./sq. yd. (g/sq. m). END OF SECTION 097200 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce 1. 48 hours before installation. D. Backing/Backcoating: Ecowox synthetic backed tile. paint systems indicated. 2. During installation. E. Size: 24 by 24 inches(610 by 610 mm). SECTION 099123-INTERIOR PAINTING D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by 3. 48 hours after installation. F. Performance Characteristics: PART 1 - GENERAL paint manufacturer. 4. We strongly recommend the permanent HVAC system be fully operating. NOTE: If a 1. Appearance Retention Rating: Heavy traffic, 3.0 minimum according to ASTM D 7330. 1.1 SUMMARY E. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded system other than the permanent HVAC source is utilized, it must provide proper control of both 2. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm according to NFPA 253. A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: smooth. AMERICAN FAMILY temperature and humidity to recommended or specific levels for the appropriate time 3. Dry Breaking Strength: Not less than 100 Ibf(445 N)according to ASTM D 2646. 1. Steel. 3.3 APPLICATION duration as stated above. 4. Delamination: Not less than 3.5 Ibf/in. (0.6 N/mm)according to ASTM D 3936. 2. Gypsum board. A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. After post installation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by 5. Dimensional Tolerance: Within 1/32 inch(0.8 mm)of specified size dimensions, as determined by 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. CARE manufacturer, but not less than 55 degF (13 degC) or more than 95 deg F(35 degC). physical measurement. A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. 6. Dimensional Stability: 0.2 percent or less according to ISO 2551 (Aachen Test). B. Virtual sample showing corresponding paint code number. final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. 7. Noise Reduction Coefficient(NRC): according to ASTM C 423. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to 3700 CA HA BA BEACH RD E. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been 8. Colorfastness to Crocking: Not less than 4,wet and dry, according to AATCC 165. A. MPI Standards: match exposed surfaces. BIRMINGHAM, A L completed. 9. Colorfastness to Light: Not less than 4 after 40AFU (AATCC fading units)according to AATCC 16, 1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in"MPI Approved Products List." B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same materia 1.7 WARRANTY Option E. 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual"for are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of 35242 A. Warranty: Ten year commercial warranty. 10. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5kV according to AATCC 134. products and paint systems indicated. undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a 2.1 LuxuryVinyl Plank LVT1 A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. Y ( ) CLIENT PROJECT NO: A. Manufacturer: See Finish Legend on Sheet A1.4 provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. maintained at not less than 45 deg F (7 deg C). D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller 1.ASTM F 1700 Class III Type B vinyl plank. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. 2. Thickness: 0.098"(3.5 mm). subfloor conditions indicated, that comply with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile, and are 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION 3. Wear layer thickness: 20 mil recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project 4. Finish: ExoGuard. C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F site. 5. Edge: Square edge. required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints. (10 and 35 deg C). B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, 6.ASTM F925 Chemical Resistance: Meets requirement. PART 3- EXECUTION B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C)above the dew scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 7.ASTM F 1515 Light fastness: Meets requirement. 3.1 EXAMINATION point; or to damp or wet surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other 8. Slip resistance ASTM D2047; comply with ADA for wet and dry conditions. A. Examine substrates, areas,and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for PART 2- PRODUCTS trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an 9.ASTM E648 Class 11. maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet 2.1 MANUFACTURERS undamaged condition. 2.2 Installation Materials performance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: D. At completion of construction activities of other trades,touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, Portland cement based or B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Sherwin-Williams Company(The). surfaces. blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE manufacturer for applications indicated. may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond A. Steel Substrates: 1. Provide trowelable leveling for a smooth level transition between LVT and carpet tile. and moisture tests recommended by carpet manufacturer. 1. Institutional Low-OdorNOC Latex System: MPI INT 5.1 S. B. Provide resilient transition strip at LVT flooring between concrete transition. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete" a. Prime Coat: Rust-inhibitive primer(water based). C. Provide metal transition strips for transition between LVT and floor tile, see Division 9 section: for slabs receiving carpet. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex matching topcoat. 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL "Tile"for metal transition strips. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex(semigloss). D.Adhesives: Owner Provided, AFC LVT ADHESIVE-258D(For Reference and Coordination C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates: NO. DATE SUBJECT A with GC Installation. 3.2 PREPARATION 1. Institutional Low-Odor1VOC Latex System: MPI INT 9.2M. A REVISION OR ISSUE PART 3-EXECUTION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation,"and with carpet a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. 3.1 EXAMINATION manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates. b. Intermediate Coat: Institutional low-odor1VOC interior latex matching topcoat. SSOE Architects, L.L.C. A. Examine substrates,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill c. Topcoat: Institutional low-odorNOC interior latex(flat, low sheen, and semigloss, where 1001 Madison Avenue tolerances, moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance. cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch indicated). Toledo OH 43604 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified (3 mm)wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch(0.8 mm), unless the manufacturer's written T. (419)255-3830 in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and instructions include more stringent requirements. In case of conflict,the more stringent requirement shall END OF SECTION 099123 6 foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products govern unless otherwise approved by the Architect. PROJECT NO: 021 -01005-00 N 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with rL Lu adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods PROJECT MANAGER: M. ALFIERI recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. DESIGNED: T. McMAHON o D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. CHECKED: L. SCHIATTER 8 0 0 DRAWING TITLE: 0 SPECIFICATIONS a� o(n Uo LL N DRAWING NO: ¢a as A9. 5 �w 1 2 3 4 I 2 3 4 SECTION 102123-CUBICLE CURTAINS AND TRACK PART 3- EXECUTION 3.4 CLEANING 2.2 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS O O 99oleo PART 1 - GENERAL 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a standard A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket 1.1 SUMMARY A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. ammonia-based household cleaning agent. indicated. O O A. Section Includes: B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,Appendix B, and bar 1. Curtain tracks and carriers. preparation before proceeding. coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging. 2. Cubicle curtains. 3.2 PREPARATION END OF SECTION 102600 B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type 2-A and 10-B:C, UL-rated with monoammonium phosphate-based dry 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. chemical in manufacturers standard enameled container. CONSULTANTS: A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for SECTION 104413-FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS 1. Include durability, laundry temperature limits,fade resistance, applied curtain treatment, and fire-test- the substrate under the project conditions. PART 1 - GENERAL A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturers standard[galvanized]steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to II response characteristics for each type of curtain fabric indicated. 3.3 INSTALLATION 1.1 SUMMARY or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated,with plated or black 2. Include data for each type of track. A. Install roller shades level, plumb, square, and true according to manufacturer's written instructions, and A. Section includes fire protection cabinet for portable fire extinguishers. baked-enamel finish. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: located so shade band is not closer than 2 inches (50 mm)to interior face of glass. Allow proper clearances 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and 1. Curtain Fabric: 10-inch-(254-mm-) square swatch or larger as required to show complete pattern for window operation hardware. A. Product Data: For each type of product. location. Locate as indicated by Architect. repeat, from dye lot used for the Work,with specified treatments applied. Mark top and face of material. B. Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction B. Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. 1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words"FIRE EXTINGUISHER"in red letter dec Is 2. Mesh Top: Not less than 10 inches (254 mm) square. throughout entire operational range. 1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS applied to mounting surface. 3. Curtain Track: Not less than 10 inches (254 mm) long. C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. A. Maintenance Data: For fire-protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals. a. Orientation:As required by Authorities Having Jurisdiction(AHJ). C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For curtains, track, and hardware to include in operation and D. Shade pockets: 1.4 COORDINATION PART 3- EXECUTION maintenance manuals. 1. Install corner pieces securely and in alignment with pockets. A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguisher indicated 3.1 INSTALLATION PART 2- PRODUCTS 2. Install pocket ends securely and in alignment with pockets. are accommodated. A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 3. After interior construction is essentially complete, install shade and operating mechanism in pocket. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths. 1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers. A. Curtains: Provide curtain fabrics with the following characteristics: 3.4 PROTECTION PART 2- PRODUCTS B. Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance with requiremer s C 1. Launderable to a temperature of not less than 60 deg F (71 deg C). A. Protect installed products until completion of project. 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS of authorities having jurisdiction. C 2. Flame resistant and identical to those that have passed NFPA 701 when tested by a testing and B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. A. Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for C. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated. inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed. a. Identify fabrics with appropriate markings of a qualified testing agency. END OF SECTION 102494 2.2 FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET END OF SECTION 104416 B. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher. 2.2 CURTAIN SUPPORT SYSTEMS SECTION 102600-WALL PROTECTION B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated SECTION 122113-LOUVER BLINDS A. Product: In Pro Corporation, as reflected in the Finish Legend. PART 1 - GENERAL 1. Cabinet Material:Aluminum sheet PART 1 - GENERAL B. Extruded-Aluminum Curtain Track: Not less than 1-1/8 inches wide by 1 1/4 inch high wall thickness. 1.1 SUMMARY C. Cabinet Construction: 1-hour fire rated or 2-hour fire rated. 1.1 SUMMARY 1. Curved Track: Factory-fabricated, 12-inch-(305-mm-) radius bends. A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.043-inch-(1.09- A. Section Includes: 2. Finish: Baked enamel, acrylic, or epoxy. 1. Wall protection per the drawings. mm-)thick cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-(16-mm-)thick fire-barrier material. Provide 1. Horizontal louver blinds with slats. C. Curtain Track Accessories: Fabricate splices, end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling and joining 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) factory-drilled mounting holes. 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) sleeves,wall flanges, brackets, ceiling clips, and other accessories from same material and with same finish A. Product Data: For each type of product. 2. Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet or Stainless-steel sheet. A. Product Data: For each type of product. SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY. as track. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions of individual D. Recessed Cabinet: B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches(300 mm)long. 1. Suspended-Track Support: Not less than 5/8-inch-(16-mm-)square tube. components and profiles, and finishes. 1. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding C. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals. 2. End Stop: Nonremovable. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following products, prepared on Samples wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING 3. Switch Unit: Shuttle and coupling device for rerouting and securing cubicle curtain,with pull chain for of size indicated below: E. Semi-recessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and ,�, switching track. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard sampling size:6 by 6 inches (150 by 150 mm) or greater. wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge(backbend). location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings. SOD `dd KC D. Curtain Carriers: Two nylon rollers and nylon axle with aluminum hook. C. For close-out booklet provide Maintenance data. 1. Square-Edge Trim: 1-1/4-to 1-1/2-inch(32-to 38-mm) backbend depth. 1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS �'S '�',j E. Exposed Fasteners: Stainless steel. 1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING 2. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet-work and fini h LOUISE M. 'l F. Concealed Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized or Stainless steel. A. Store wall and door protection in original undamaged packages and containers inside well-ventilated area F. Surface-Mounted Cabinet: Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no trim. work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions arE $CHLATTER CA 2.3 CURTAINS protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. G. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door. maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. i 1-3 A. Manufacturer: In Pro Corporation, as reflected in the Finish Legend. 1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F(21 deg C)during the period H. Door Material: Same material as cabinet box. B. Field Measurements:Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify B. Curtain Grommets: Two-piece, rolled-edge, rustproof, nickel-plated brass; spaced not more than 6 inches plastic materials are stored. 1. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame. dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on • TOLEDO,OH (152 mm)o.c.; machined into top hem. 2. Keep plastic materials out of direct sunlight. J. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear) Shop Drawings.Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating "J ARI-11622 C. Mesh Top: Not less than 20-inch-(508-mm-)high mesh top of No. 50 nylon mesh. 3. Store plastic wall-and door-protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic material K. Door Hardware: Manufacturers standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule wit 1 Cid D. Curtain Tieback: Nickel-plated brass chain; one at each curtain termination. attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F(21 deg C). style, and door material and style indicated. construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. � r 2.4 CURTAIN FABRICATION a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. PART 2- PRODUCTS A/, c+/ /�{/Q� �J] A. Fabricate curtains as follows: b. Store wall-guards covers in a horizontal position. L. Accessories: 2.1 MANUFACTURERS �(yui!'dc i r I T 1. Width: Equal to track length from which curtain is hung plus 10 percent added fullness, but not less PART 2- PRODUCTS 1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturers standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire- A. Manufacturer type and color as reflected on the Finish Legend Notes. 09/02/2021 than 12 inches(305 mm)added fullness. 2.1 MANUFACTURER protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated,with plated or 1. Width: 1 inch. 2. Length: Equal to floor-to-ceiling height, minus depth of track and carrier at top, and minus clearance A. Product: In Pro Corporation, as reflected in the Finish Legend. baked-enamel finish. 2. Thickness: Manufacturer's standard. above the finished floor as follows: 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 2. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and 3. Spacing: Manufacturer's standard. PROJECT INFORMATION a. Cubicle Curtains: as reflected in the plans. A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84 or UL 723;testing by a qualified testing agency. location. 4. Finish: Ionized antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish. 3. Top Hem: Not less than 1 inch(25.4 mm)and not more than 1-1/2 inches(38 mm)wide, triple Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. M. Materials: 5. Features: thickness, reinforced with integral web, and double lock-stitched. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 1. Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel(CS), Type B. a. Lift-Cord Rout Holes: Minimum size required for lift cord and located near back(outside) e 4. Mesh Top: Top hem of mesh not less than 1 inch (25.4 mm)and not more than 1-1/2 inches(38 mm) 2. Smoke-Developed Index:450 or less. a. Finish: Factory primed for field painting or Baked enamel or powder coat. of slat to maximize slat overlap and minimize light gaps between slats. wide, triple thickness, reinforced with integral web, and double lockstitched. Double lockstitch bottom of B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S.Architectural &Transportation b. Color:As selected by Owner from full range of industry colors and color densities to match B. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled. Headrails fully enclose R mesh directly to 1/2-inch (13-mm)triple thickness, top hem of curtain fabric. Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. wall color. operating mechanisms on three sides. T I GA R D t O 5. Bottom Hem: Not less than 1 inch(25.4 mm)and not more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)wide, double C. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. 2. Aluminum:ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221 M),with strength and durability characteristics of not less than 1. Capacity: One blind(s)per headrail unless otherwise indicated. thickness and single lock-stitched. 2.3 WALL GUARDS Alloy 6063-T5 for aluminum sheet.ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M)for extruded shapes. 2. Ends: Manufacturers standard. 11 675 SW PACIFIC HWY. 6. Side Hems: Not less than 1/2 inch(13 mm) and not more than 1-1/4 inches(32 mm)wide, with A. Opaque-Plastic Chair Rail(RAIL1, RAIL2) Standard-duty, assembly consisting of continuous snap-on a. Finish: Clear anodic 3. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Lengths: Manufacturer's standard. doubleturned edges, and single lock-stitched. cover installed over continuous retainer. 3. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304. C. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube that secures and protects ends of ladders and lift T I GA R D, OREGON 97223 B. Vertical Seams: Not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm)wide, double turned and double stitched. B. Product: In Pro Corporation, as reflected in the Finish Legend. a. Finish: No.4 directional satin finish cords and has plastic-or metal-capped ends. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1. Cover: Extruded rigid plastic, minimum 0.080-inch(2.0-mm)wall thickness; as follows: 4. Tempered Float Glass:ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 1. Type: Manufacturer's standard. 3.1 EXAMINATION a. Profile: Rounded bullnose profile, nominal 6 inches high by 1 inch deep and 4 inches high by (clear) D. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard braided cord. A. Examine substrates and conditions,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for installation 1 inch deep. 2.3 FABRICATION E. Ladders: Evenly spaced across headrail at spacing that prevents long-term slat sag. tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. b. Color and Texture: as reflected in the Finish Legend. A. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box(tub)with trim, frame, door,and hardware 1. Type: Braided cord. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Retainer: Minimum 0.080-inch (2.0-mm)thick, one-piece, extruded aluminum. to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. F. Valance: Manufacturer's standard. 3.2 INSTALLATION 3. Bumper: Continuous, resilient bumper cushion(s). 1. Weld joints and grind smooth. G. Mounting Brackets: With spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated. B A. General: Install tracks level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 4. End Caps and Corners: Prefabricated, injection-molded plastic; color matching cover;field adjustable 2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. 1. Type: As indicated. B B. Up to 20 feet(6.0 m) in length, provide track fabricated from single, continuous length. for close alignment with snap-on cover. 3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks. 2. Intermediate Support: Provide intermediate support brackets to produce support spacing 1. Curtain Track Mounting: Surface. 5. Accessories: Concealed splices and mounting hardware. B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards,from materials indicated and recommended by blind manufacturer for weight and size of blind. C. Surface-Track Mounting: Fasten tracks to ceilings at intervals recommended by manufacturer. Fasten 6. Mounting: Surface mounted directly to wall. coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles. H. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturers standard. tracks to structure at each splice and tangent point of each corner. Center fasteners in track to ensure 2.4 CORNER GUARDS 1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch (13 2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION unencumbered carrier operation. Attach track to ceiling as follows: A. Plastic-Cover Corner Guards (CG, EG) Manufacturer's standard assembly consisting clear resilient plastic mm)thick. A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate horizontal louver blinds to comply with WCMA A 100.1 including 1. Mechanically fasten directly to bottom of concrete deck with post-installed anchors. cover that is flush with adjacent wall surface, including mounting hardware; fabricated with 90-or 135-degree 2. Fabricate door frames of one-piece construction with edges flanged. requirements for corded, flexible, looped devices; lead content of components; and warning labels. 2. Mechanically fasten directly to finished ceiling with toggle bolts. turn to match wall condition; full wall height. 3. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74 deg F( 3 CLIENT INFORMATION 3. Mechanically fasten to furring through suspended ceiling with screw and tube spacer. 1. Product: In Pro Corporation, as reflected in the Finish Legend. C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with comers mitered,welded, and ground smooth. deg C): 4. Mechanically fasten to suspended ceiling grid with screws. 2. Cover: clear plastic, minimum 0.100 2.5mm thickness. 2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS 1. Between (Inside)Jamb Installation: Width equal to jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which blip 5. Attach track to suspended ceiling grid with manufacturers proprietary clip. a. Profile: Nominal 2 1/2 inch by 2 1/2 inch. A. Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products,"for is installed less 1/4 inch(6 mm) per side or 1/2 inch(13 mm)total, plus or minus 1/8 inch(3.1 mm). D. Suspended-Track Mounting: Install track with manufacturer's standard tubular aluminum suspended b. Height: 4 feet(1.2 m). Mount directly above base. recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Length equal to head4o-sill dimension of opening in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch(6 mm), plus or supports at intervals and with fasteners recommended by manufacturer. Fasten supports to structure. c. Color and Texture: as reflected in the Finish Legend. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by applying a minus 1/8 inch(3.1 mm). Provide supports at each splice and tangent point of each corner. Secure ends of track to wall with flanged 3. Install per manufacturer's written instructions with self-tapping screw attachment. strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. 2. Outside of Jamb Installation: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between blinds of end 0 fittings or brackets. 4. Corner guards need to be fire rated only if they are recessed in fire-rated walls. C. Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly. to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations between openings. E. Track Accessories: Install splices, end caps, connectors, end stops, coupling and joining sleeves, and 2.5 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL COVERINGS D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in C. Concealed Components: Non-corrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials. other accessories as required for a secure and operational installation. A. Impact-Resistant Sheet Wall Covering(FRPt): Fabricated from plastic sheet wall-covering material. appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are 1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts. 1. Provide one locking switch unit for each bed/table. 1. Product: Crane Composites assembled or installed to minimize contrast. D. Mounting and Intermediate Brackets: Designed for removal and reinstallation of blind without damaging F. Curtain Carriers: Provide curtain carriers adequate for 6-inch (152-mm) spacing along full length of curtain 2. Size:48 by 120 inches. PART 3- EXECUTION blind and adjacent surfaces,for supporting blind components, and for bracket positions and blind placement AMERICAN FAMILY plus an additional carrier. 3. Sheet Thickness: varies 0.09". 3.1 EXAMINATION indicated. G. Curtains: Hang curtains on each curtain track. Secure with curtain tieback. 4. Class A or Class C fiber embossed wall protection panels. A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semi-recessed E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket,fabricated from metal noncorrosive to 5. Height:4'-0" high. cabinets will be installed. brackets and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blind CARE END OF SECTION 102123 6. Trims, inside and outside corners and joint moldings: Extruded rigid plastic that matches sheet wall B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. and accessories under conditions of normal use. covering color. 3.2 PREPARATION F. Calor-Coated Finish: 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD SECTION 102494-ROLLER SHADES 7. Mounting: Adhesive. A. Prepare recesses for recessed and semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of 1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying wit PART 1 - GENERAL 8. Seal top, bottom and all edges where wall protection meets walls. cabinet and trim style. manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, ar d BIRMINGHAMAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES 2.6 MATERIALS 3.3 INSTALLATION minimum dry film thickness. + A. Manually operated shades, roll-up fabric interior window shades including mounting hardware. A. Plastic Materials: Chemical-and stain-resistant, high-impact-resistant plastic with integral color A. General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at PART 3- EXECUTION 35242 1.2 REFERENCES throughout; extruded and sheet material as required,thickness as indicated. heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3.1 EXAMINATION A. ASTM G 21 -Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric Materials to Fungi. B. Fasteners:Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless-steel, or other noncorrosive metal screws, bolts, and other B. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb. A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for B. NFPA 701-99-Fire Tests for Flame-Resistant Textiles and Films. fasteners compatible with items being fastened. Use security-type fasteners where exposed to view. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is inadequate installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. CLIENT PROJECT NO: 1.3 SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) C. Adhesive:As recommended by protection product manufacturer. for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Product Data: Manufacturers data sheets on each product to be used, including: 2.7 FABRICATION 2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb. 3.2 INSTALLATION 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. A. Fabricate wall protection according to requirements indicated for design, performance,dimensions,and C. Identification: Apply decals or vinyl lettering. A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned with 2. Styles, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, profiles,features,finishes and member sizes, including thicknesses of components. 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING adjacent units according to manufacturers written instructions. operating instructions. B. Quality: Fabricate components with uniformly tight seams and joints and with exposed edges rolled. A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets are 1. Locate so exterior slat edges are not closer than 1 inch (25 mm)from interior faces of glass and not 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. Provide surfaces free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. closer than 1/2 inch (13 mm)from interior faces of glazing frames through full operating ranges of blinds 4. Mounting details and installation methods. members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints. B. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding.Verify that integral locking devices 2. Install mounting and intermediate brackets to prevent deflection of headrails. B. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, one complete set of shade components, 2.8 FINISHES operate properly. 3. Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds, adjacent construction, and unassembled, demonstrating compliance with specified requirements. Shadecloth sample and aluminum A. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering C. On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommended operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments, and similar building components and finish sample as selected. Mark face of material to indicate interior faces. before shipping. by manufacturer. furnishings. C. Maintenance Data: Methods for maintaining roller shades, precautions regarding cleaning materials and B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finished 3.3 ADJUSTING methods, instructions for operating hardware and controls. appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet and A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through full operating ranges. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE assembled or installed to minimize contrast. mounting bracket manufacturers. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Installer Qualifications: Installer trained and certified by the manufacturer with a minimum often years PART 3- EXECUTION E. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation according to manufacturers written instructions. experience in installing products comparable to those specified in this section. 3.1 EXAMINATION by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer th t B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Passes NFPA 701-99 small and large-scale vertical bum. Materials A. Examine substrates and wall areas,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation ensures that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. tested shall be identical to products proposed for use. tolerances, fire rating, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. END OF SECTION 104413 C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired in a manner approved by Architect C. Anti-Microbial Characteristics: 'No Growth' per ASTM G 21 results for fungi ATCC9642, ATCC 9644, B. Examine walls to which wall and door protection will be attached for blocking, grounds, and other solid before time of Substantial Completion. 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL ATCC9645. backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment of support fasteners. SECTION 104416-FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 3.5 DEMONSTRATION NO. DATE SUBJECT A 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING 1. For wall and door protection attached with adhesive, verify compatibility with and suitability of PART 1 - GENERAL A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, q I REVISION OR ISSUE A. Deliver shades in factory-labeled packages, marked with manufacturer and product name,fire-test- substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. 1.1 SUMMARY operate, and maintain systems. response characteristics, and location of installation using same room designations indicated on Drawings. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers. SSO Architects, L.L.C. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS 3.2 PREPARATION 1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) END OF SECTION 122113 1001Toledi43604 n43 A. Environmental Limitations: Install roller shades after finish work including painting is complete and A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing wall and door protection. A. Product Data: For each type of product. T. (419)255-3830 ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles. 1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) SECTION 134900-RADIATION PROTECTION 2 for its intended use. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. PART 1 - GENERAL c 1.7 WARRANTY A. Installation Quality: Install wall and door protection according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) 1.1 SUMMARY PROJECT NO: 021 -01005-00 a A. Roller Shade Hardware, Chain and Shadecloth: Manufacturers standard non-depreciating five year limited plumb, and true to line without distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks,voids, stains, or other A. Operation and maintenance data. A. Section Includes: W defects that might be visible in the finished Work. 1.5 COORDINATION 1. Lead sheet, strip, and late. PROJECT MANAGER: M.ALFIERI < warranty. 9 P. P B. Roller Shade Installation: One year from date of Substantial Completion, not including scaffolding, lifts or B. Mounting Heights: Install wall protection in locations and at mounting heights indicated. A. Coordinate a and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function. 2. Lead-lined DESIGNED: T. McMAHON i y p g g, 9 9 p 9 9 type P ty 9 P gypsum board. o other means to reach inaccessible areas. C. Accessories: Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, trim,joint moldings, and other accessories 1.6 WARRANTY 3. Lead glass. CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER 8 PART 2- PRODUCTS required for a complete installation. A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire 4. Lead-lined, hollow-metal door frames. o 2.1 TYPE 1. Provide anchoring devices and suitable locations to withstand imposed loads. extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 5. Lead-lined flush wood doors. DRAWING TITLE: o A. Legrand Teleshade as indicated in The Finish Legend 2. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet(6.1 m), splice aluminum retainers and PART 2- PRODUCTS 6. Lead-lined, observation-window frames. N< 9 9 plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than 12 inches 305 mm apart. 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 7. Informational signs. SPECIFICATIONS c 2.2 APPLICATIONS/SCOPE P 9 ( ) P 9 a+n A. Roller Shade Schedule: 3. Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams. A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire 1.2 DEFINITIONS O N 1. Manual shades(3%openness factor)per the Finish Legend. D. Wall Covering: Install top and edge moldings, corners, and divider bars as required for a complete Extinguishers." A. Lead Equivalence: The thickness of lead that provides the same attenuation (reduction of radiation v 4 2.3 SHADE CLOTH installation. B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency passing through)as the material in question under the specified conditions. o,, A. Visually Transparent Single-Fabric Shadecloth: PVC-coated polyester; 3%openness/woven. acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Lead equivalence specified for materials used in diagnostic x-ray rooms is as measured at 100 kV o unless otherwise indicated. U 0 a DRAWING NO Q A SECTION 134900 CONTINUED ON SHEET A9.7 A9. 6 0 0) W ui M< ED 0 1 1 2 3 1 4 1 2 3 4 SECTION 134900-RADIATION PROTECTION -CONTINUED FROM SHEET A9.6 PART 3- EXECUTION O O 99oleo 3.1 EXAMINATION 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) 3.2 INSTALLATION OF LEAD SHEETS IN CONCRETE FLOOR SLABS A. Product Data: For each type of product. A. Proceed with installation only after concrete surfaces are clean, dry, and free of depressions and sharp B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of radiation-protected areas. Indicate lead thickness or lead equivalence of projections that could damage or penetrate lead sheet. components. Show components and installation conditions not fully dimensioned or detailed in product data. B. Apply a coat of asphalt mastic or paint to concrete surfaces before installing lead sheet. CONSULTANTS. 1. Show ducts, pipes, conduit, and other objects that penetrate radiation protection; include details of C. Before installing floor lead sheet, place lead strips not less than 7 inches(175 mm)wide under the base of penetrations. vertical wall protection. Extend lead strips approximately 3 inches (75 mm) into the shielded room area. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) D. Lead Sheet, 1/8 Inch(3 mm)Thick or Less: Install in a single layer with a 2-inch (50-mm) minimum lap at A. Field quality-control reports. joints. B. Sample Warranty: For warranty. E. Lead Sheet More Than 1/8 Inch (3 mm)Thick: Install in two or more layers with a 2-inch (50-mm) 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE minimum lap at joints, or in a single layer with joints butted and covered with a 4-inch-(100-mm-)wide lead A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. strip of same thickness. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Licensed by authorities having jurisdiction to perform radiation shielding F. In floor slabs above shielded rooms where lead sheet is indicated, extend lead sheet at least 12 inches surveys. (300 mm)beyond radiation protection in walls of room below. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING G. At door openings, extend lead sheet at least 12 inches (300 mm) beyond radiation protection in walls and A. Lead-Lined Gypsum Panels: Neatly stack panels flat to prevent deformation. at least 12 inches (300 mm) beyond door opening on both sides except where lead-lined thresholds are B. Lead-Lined, Hollow-Metal Door Frames: Comply with requirements in Section 081113"Hollow Metal provide. Doors and Frames"for delivery, storage, and handling. H. After installation, apply two coats of asphalt coating on top surface of lead sheet and protect from damage C C. Lead-Lined Flush Wood Doors: Comply with manufacturers written instructions and requirements in until concrete topping is placed. WDMA I.S.1-A. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF LEAD-LINED GYPSUM BOARD C 1. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. A. Install with long edge parallel to supports and lead lining facing supports. Provide blocking at end joints. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS B. Fastening to Metal Supports: Use steel drill screws spaced as recommended in writing by gypsum board A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install radiation protection until spaces are enclosed and manufacturer. weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and 1. Install lead strips covering face of framing and wrap around flange to cover points of screws. Where maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the possible, install lead-lined gypsum board before installing gypsum board on other side of partition, and do construction period. not fold lead strips back over inside of flange until after lead-lined gypsum board is applied.Apply lead 1.8 WARRANTY disks recessed flush with surface of board over heads of screws securing trim. B. Warranty for Lead-Lined Flush Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in Section 081416"Flush Wood C. Fastening to Wood Supports: Use lead-headed nails spaced as recommended in writing by gypsum board Doors. manufacturer. Drill pilot holes to prevent deforming nails or distorting board. Drive nail heads slightly below PART 2- PRODUCTS exposed surface. SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 1. Install lead strips,2 inches(50 mm)wide and same thickness as lead lining,to face of supports and A. Provide materials and workmanship, including joints and fasteners, that maintain continuity of radiation blocking where joints occur. Secure lead strips with construction adhesive. Provide shims at face of protection at all points and in all directions equivalent to materials specked in thicknesses and locations supports and blocking where joints do not occur. indicated. 2. Fasten accessories and trim to wood supports with lead-headed nails as specified above for fastening 1. Radiation protection design is provided by Owners radiation health physicist. The Radiation Shielding gypsum board. D Report design is available to Contractor. D. Two-Layer System:Apply a facing sheet of gypsum board vertically over base sheet using laminating ,5� ARC B. Lead-Lined Assemblies: Unless otherwise indicated, provide lead thickness indoors, door frames,window adhesive recommended in writing by gypsum board manufacturer. Offset joints in finish layer from joints in �5 1� frames, penetration shielding,joint strips,film transfer cabinets, and other items located in lead-lined base layer, and fasten at top and bottom of sheet to support finish panel until adhesive has set. LOUISE M. tl� assemblies not less than that indicated for assemblies in which they are installed. 1. Locate fasteners above ceiling or behind wall base and cover fasteners with lead disks recessed flush SCHLATTER 0 C. Lead Glazing: Unless otherwise indicated, provide lead equivalence not less than that indicated for with surface of board. H assembly in which glazing is installed. E. Openings: Extend lead-lined gypsum board into frames of openings, lapping lead lining with lead frames or • TOLEDO,OH D. Fire-Rated Door and Frame Assemblies: Comply with Section 081113"Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" frame linings at least 1 inch (25 mm).Arrange board around openings so neither horizontal nor vertical joints and Section 081416"Flush Wood Doors". occur at corners of openings. ARI-11622 �0 E. Sustainable Design Requirements: Comply with Authorities Having Jurisdiction. F. Install control and expansion joints where indicated,with appropriate trim accessories. Install lead strip on , 2.2 MANUFACTURERS face of framing, extending across joint, and lap with lead lining of gypsum board. -/ 1 1_r A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of radiation protection product from single source from single G. Finish lead-lined gypsum board to comply with Section 092900"Gypsum Board." /�T�/"� �F� �Q.4/ manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF LEAD-LINED DOORS AND DOOR FRAMES VVV///IXC 09/02/2021 2.3 MATERIALS A. Install lead-lined steel door frames according to Section 081113"Hollow Metal Doors and Frames." A. Lead Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM B 749,Alloy UNS No. L51121 (chemical-copper lead). B. Install lead-lined wood doors according to Section 081416"Flush Wood Doors." B. Lead-Lined Gypsum Board: 5/8-inch-(16-mm-)thick gypsum board complying with Section 092900 C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000"Glazing"and with door manufacturers "Gypsum Board,"of width and length required for support spacing and to prevent cracking during handling, written instructions. PROJECT INFORMATION and with a single sheet of lead laminated to the back of the board. D. Lap lead lining of frames over lining in walls at least 1 inch (25 mm). 1. Lead Sheet Lining: Full width of board and height as required to comply with requirements as E. Hardware: Line covers, escutcheons, and plates to provide effective shielding at cutouts and penetrations indicated in Radiation Shielding Report. of frames and doors. 2. Furnish 3-inch-(75-mm-)wide lead strips for wrapping metal stud flanges. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF LEAD-LINED OBSERVATION WINDOWS T I GA R D O R 3. Furnish 2-inch-(50-mm-)wide lead strips for backing joints. A. Install observation windows according to manufacturers written installation instructions. 4. Furnish 5/8-inch (16-mm) lead disks for covering screw heads. B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, and anchored securely in place to structural support. 5. Furnish lead-headed nails for fastening gypsum board, accessories, and trim to wood members. C. Install leaded side of frame on radiation side of wall. Lap lead lining of frames over lining in walls at least 1 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. 6. Furnish finishing materials, accessories, and trim for lead-lined gypsum board complying with inch (25 mm). Section 092900"Gypsum Board." D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000"Glazing"and with manufacturer's T I GAR D, OREGON 97223 C. Lead Glass: Lead-barium, polished glass containing not less than 60 percent heavy metal oxides, written instructions. including not less than 48 percent lead oxide by weight. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF PENETRATING ITEMS 1. Safety Glass: Tempered lead glass. A. At penetrations of lead linings, provide lead shields to maintain continuity of protection. a. Outer Ply: Clear float glass. B. Provide lead linings, sleeves, shields, and other protection in thickness not less than that required in b. Interlayer: Clear polyvinyl butyral. assembly being penetrated. c. Inner Ply: Lead glass;thickness as needed to provide lead equivalence require C. Secure shields at penetrations using adhesive or wire ties but not penetrating fasteners unless indicated D. Glazing Compounds, Gaskets, and Accessories: Comply with requirements in Section 088000"Glazing." on Drawings. B E. Accessories and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard fasteners and accessories as required for D. Outlet Boxes and Conduit: Cover or line with lead sheet lapped over adjacent lead lining at least 1 inch (25 installation, maintaining same lead equivalence as rest of system. mm).Wrap conduit with lead sheet for a distance of not less than 10 inches (250 mm)from box. B F. Asphalt Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M. E. Duct Openings: Unless otherwise indicated, line or wrap ducts with lead sheet for distance from G. Asphalt Felt:ASTM D 226/D 226M. partition/ceiling equal to three times the largest opening dimension. Lap lead sheet with adjacent lead lining at 2.4 LEAD-LINED, HOLLOW-METAL DOOR FRAMES least 1 inch (25 mm). A. General: Steel door frames complying with NAAMM-HMMA 861, except 0.0667 inch(1.7 mm)thick, lined F. Piping: Unless otherwise indicated,wrap piping with lead sheet for a distance of not less than 10 inches with lead sheet of thickness not less than that required for doors and walls where frames are used. (250 mm)from point of penetration. 1. Furnish with additional reinforcements and internal supports to adequately carry the weight of lead- 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL lined doors. Install reinforcements and supports before installing lead lining. A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections after radiology CLIENT INFORMATION: 2. Form lead sheet to match frame contour, continuous in each jamb and across the head, lapping the equipment has been installed and placed in operating condition. stops. Form lead shields around areas prepared to receive hardware. Fabricate lead lining wide enough to B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace radiation protection that inspection reports indicate does not maintain an effective lap with lead of adjacent shielding. comply with specified requirements. 3. Finish:Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. Field paint. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. a. Color and Gloss:As indicated on the Room Finish Legend. O 2.5 LEAD-LINED FLUSH WOOD DOORS END OF SECTION 134900 A. Lead-Lined Flush Wood Doors: Solid-core wood doors with lead lining,thickness not less than that required for partition in which door is installed. 1. Door Construction:Veneer face, seven ply, bonded mineral(as required for fire rating)or structural composite lumber core. 2. Lead Lining: One or more continuous sheets of lead extending from top to bottom and edge to edge, AMERICAN FAVIL / constructed either in the core or between the core and faces, at manufacturer's option. 3. Lead Lining: One continuous sheet of lead extending from top to bottom and edge to edge, CARE � constructed in the core.Assemble lead lining and core with poured lead fasteners or steel bolts. Space AR C C fasteners not more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm)from door edge and about 8 inches(200 mm)o.c. Countersink bolt heads and cover with lead. 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD 4. Comply with Section 081416"Flush Wood Doors"for grade,faces, veneer matching, performance grade, fabrication, finishing, and other requirements unless otherwise indicated. BIRMINGHAM, A L 5. Grade: Custom 6. Face Veneer Species and Cut: White birch, plain sliced 35242 a. Veneer Matching: Book match. b. Factory finish with transparent catalyzed lacquer or conversion varnish. c. Color, Patterns, and Finishes:As indicated on the Room Finish Legend. CLIENT PROJECT NO B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty. C. Shield cutouts for locksets with lead sheet of same thickness used indoor. Lap lining of cutouts with door lining. D. Factory fit doors to suit frame openings indicated with 1/16-inch(1.5-mm)doors for hardware not surface applied. 2.6 LEAD-LINED, OBSERVATION-WINDOW FRAMES A. General: Fabricate from 0.043-inch-(1.1-mm-)thick, formed-steel sheet or 0.064-inch-(1.6-mm-)thick aluminum extrusions with mitered corners,welded or bolted with concealed fasteners. 1. Line with lead sheet formed to match frame contour, continuous in each jamb and across head and sill, lapping the stops, and fabricated wide enough to maintain an effective lap with lead of adjoining assemblies. 2. Construct so lead lining overlaps glazing material perimeter by at least 3/8 inch (9.5 mm)and furnish removable stops. 3. Form sill with an opening for sound transmission. Offset sound passage to make opening lightproof and to maintain required lead equivalence at all points and in all directions. 2.7 INFORMATIONAL SIGNS A. Informational Signs: High-pressure-laminate engraving stock with contrasting face and core, machine 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL engraved from master templates for accurately formed letters, numbers, and symbols. A 1. Color:As indicated on the Room Finish Legend. NO. DATE SUBJECT 2. Provide copy indicated or as directed. A REVISION OR ISSUE 3. Indicate lead equivalence in millimeters and heights of radiation protection in inches(millimeters). B. Rooms Where the Level of Protection Is Uniform Throughout: Provide one sign for each room indicating 1001 Architects, L.L.C. 1001 Madison Avenue lead equivalence of partitions, ceilings, floors, doors, and other portions of radiation protection enclosure. Toledo OH 43604 Indicate height of radiation protection above floor or indicate that partitions are radiation protected to full height. T. (419 255-3830 C. Rooms Where the Level of Protection Is Not Uniform Throughout: Provide one sign for each room with different lead equivalences in different locations. Indicate, in tabular form, lead equivalence of each wall, a. PROJECT NO: 021 - partition, ceiling, floor, door, and window. Indicate height of radiation protection above floor or indicate that 01 OO5-OO a partitions are radiation protected to full height. Indicate where lead equivalence changes or is not continuous. D. Rooms Where Some Partitions Are without Radiation Protection: Provide one sign for each partition that PROJECT MANAGER: M. ALFIERI f contains radiation protection and indicate its lead equivalence. Indicate height of radiation protection above DESIGNED: T. McMAHON of floor or indicate that partitions are radiation protected to full height. CHECKED: L. SCHLATTER o E. Rooms Where Only the Door Has Radiation Protection: Provide one sign for each door indicating its lead equivalence. DRAWING TITLE: o 2.8 DOOR AND DOOR FRAME FABRICATION SPECIFICATIONS 0 < A. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare doors and frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include a ro o cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule. o or Uo DRAWING NO: a a A9.7 w � Q mo 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 SECTION 072419-WATER-DRAINAGE EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SYSTEM (EIFS) PART 3- EXECUTION 2.2 ALUMINUM SIDING PANELS F. Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight moun ng, O 0 99oa, PART 1 - GENERAL 3.1 EIFS INSTALLATION A. General: Provide aluminum siding panels designed to be installed by lapping and interconnecting side and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components. 1.1 SUMMARY A. Comply with ASTM C 1397,ASTM E 2511, and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching through panel to supports using concealed fasteners 1. Install components required for a complete metal panel system including trim, comers, seam cow rs, A. Section Includes: EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated. in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation. flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Provide types indicated by r etal 1. EIFS-clad drainage-wall assemblies that are field applied over substrate: B. The systems shall be installed in accordance with the Dryvit Outsulation LCMD Systems 1-5 Application B. Aluminum Siding Panels: Basis of design: LONGBOARD-Division of Mayne Coatings Corp., 27575-50th panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated, provide types recommended by metal panel manufacture . a. Dryvk Outsulation LCMD Systems 1-5 Instructions, HYPERLINK"hftp:/twww.dryvft.com/media/328343/dsl72.pdf'DS172 Ave. Langley, BC; Canada V4W OA2; Tel: 800-604-0343; Email: G. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation CONSULTANTS. 2. Water-resistive coatings. C. Sealant shall not be applied directly to textured finishes or base coat surfaces. Dryvit Outsulation LCMD request info(info(cDlongboardproducts.com); Web:www.longboardproducts.com instructions, and SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where 1.2 REFERENCES Systems 1-5 surfaces in contact with sealant shall be coated with Demandit Smooth or Color Prime. 1. Panels: Longboard extruded aluminum wood grain siding panels with Alluminate bonded film finish. possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints, and seams tha are A. ASTM E 2568 Standard Specification for PB Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems D. Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, at windowsills,and elsewhere as 2. Profile: 6" Channel 24'-0"plank(1.57mm base mtl thickness). permanently watertight. 1.3 DEFINITIONS indicated. Coordinate with installation of insulation. 3. Panel Pretreatment: E-CLPS Chrome Free five stage aluminum pretreatment system. Complies with 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling, and tool marks, and that is true to line ar d A. Base Coat: Material used to encapsulate one or more layers of reinforcing mesh fully embedded that is E. Board Insulation:Adhere insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397 and the following: AAMA 2603 AAMA 2604 and AAMA 2605 Superior Performance Standard and meets EPA, OSHA, levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and t im applied to the outside surface of the EPS. 1. Apply adhesive to insulation by notched-trowel method,with notches oriented vertically to produce State and Local environmental requirements and contains no chromates, cyanides or other heavy to fit substrates and to achieve waterproof performance. B. Building Expansion Joint: A joint through the entire building structure designed to accommodate structural drainage channels that remain functional after the insulation is adhered to substrate. metals. Waste treatment is usually a simple pH neutralization and disposal to the sanitary sewer. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement. 2. Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not allow water to 4. Finish: Smooth powder coat finish: Alluminate Premium Wood Finishes use a polyurethane powder movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet(3 m)with no joints allowed within 24 inches (610 mm) f C. Contractor: The contractor that installs the Outsulation LCMD Systems 1-5 to the substrate. penetrate behind flashing and water-resistive barrier. coat with ink based wood grain patterns sublimated into the base powder effectively tattooing the corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be D. Dryvit: Dryvit Systems, Inc., the manufacturer of the Outsulation LCMD Systems 1-5, a Rhode Island F. Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated and where required by EIFS manufacturer. powder. The combined effect creates all the aesthetic aspects of real wood while offering the same waterproof, forth expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) p, corporation. G. The installation of Machine Coated Dryvit EPS Shapes and Starter Boards shall be in accordance with environmental advantages of powder coated finishes. filled with mastic sealant(concealed within joints). E. Expansion Joint:A structural discontinuity in the Outsulation LCMD Systems 1-5. Dryvit Publication DS854. 5. Accessories: Prefinished aluminum to match siding panels. Provide starter strips, J-molding, inside 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION F. Finish: An acrylic-based coating, available in a variety of textures and colors that is applied over the base H. Waterproof AdhesiveBase Coat: To exposed surfaces of insulation, apply in minimum thickness and outside corner trim pieces, finishing cap and base, and fasteners for a complete system. A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal panels are installed unlE ss C coat recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer over where indicated on Drawings. 6. Color: As indicated on the drawings. otherwise indicated in manufacturers written installation instructions. On completion of metal panel G. Insulation Board: Expanded Polystyrene(EPS)insulation board,which is affixed to the substrate and I. Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation and foam build-outs in minimum thickness 2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal panel manufacturer. Maintain in a cle nC creates a layer of continuous insulation. recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer. The overall minimum base coat thickness shall be A. Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheet, condition during construction. H. Mechanical Fasteners:A combination of polypropylene washers and corrosion resistant fasteners used to sufficient to fully embed the mesh. The recommended method is to apply the base coat in two(2)passes. ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275 hot-dip galvanized)coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, B. After metal panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt, and seala t secure the insulation board to the substrate. J. Reinforcing Mesh: Embed reinforcing mesh in wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free installation with mesh Class AZ50(Class AZM150)aluminum-zinc-alloy coating designation unless otherwise indicated. C. Replace metal panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by fini I. Reinforcing Mesh: Glass fiber mesh(es) used to reinforce the base coat and to provide impact resistance. continuous at comers, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches(64 mm)or otherwise treated at joints to Provide manufacturers standard sections as required for support and alignment of metal panel touchup or similar minor repair procedures. J. Sheathing:A substrate in sheet form. comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturers written instructions. Do not lap reinforcing mesh system. K. Substrate: The material to which the Outsulation LCMD Systems 1-5 is affixed. within 8 inches (204 mm)of comers. Completely embed mesh, applying additional base-coat material if B. Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete,weathertight panel system including END OF SECTION L. Substrate System: The total wall assembly including the attached substrate to which the water-resistive necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are invisible. trim, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets,fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish barrier is affixed. K. Double-Layer Reinforcing-Mesh Application: Where indicated or required, apply second base coat and of metal panels unless otherwise indicated. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION second layer of reinforcing mesh, overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches (64 mm)or otherwise treated at 1. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or closed-cell A. General: The Dryvit Outsulation LCMD Systems 1-5 is an Exterior Insulation and Finish System(EIFS) joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions in same manner as first laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch-(25-mm-)thick, flexible closure strips, cut or premolded to SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY: Class PB, designed for use on noncombustible or combustible type construction. Outsulation LCMD application. Do not apply until first base coat has cured. match metal panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or necessary to ensure weathertight Systems 1-5 is installed over a code approved water-resistive barrier(sheet type)and consists of a L. Additional Reinforcing Mesh:Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings, extending 4 inches (100 mm) construction. drainage medium and drainage accessories, expanded polystyrene insulation board, adhesive or beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch (230-by-300-mm)strip reinforcing mesh diagonally at C. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal panels as required to mechanical attachment method, base coat, reinforcing mesh(es)and finish. corners of openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8-inch-(200-mm-)wide, strip reinforcing mesh at both seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system B. Acceptable system configuration options include: inside and outside corners unless base layer of mesh is lapped not less than 4 inches (100 mm)on each as adjacent metal panels. OD ARC 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS(FOR OWNER REVIEW) side of corners. D. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide concealed clip with .S�' �r A. Product Data: For each EIFS component,trim, and accessory M. High impact meshes shall be installed as specified at ground level, high traffic areas, and other areas designed for fitting behind panel joints. 5 j B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texturespecified. ex osed to or susceptible to impact damage. E. Panel Sealants: Provide sealant es recommended b manufacturer that are compatible with panel V~ LOUISE M. 'l P P PP P P 9 types Y P P t1f, 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) N. Double Base-Coat Application:Where indicated, apply second base coat in same manner and thickness materials, are nonstaining, and do not damage panel finish. W xSCHLATTER 0 A. Manufacturer certificates. as first application, except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply until first base coat has cured. 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape B. Product certificates. O. Primer:Apply over dry base coat according to EIFS manufacturers written instructions. with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch • TOLEDO,OH C. Product test reports. P. Finish Coat: Apply over dry primed base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, (13 mm)wide and 1/8 inch(3 mm)thick. ,$ D. Field quality-control reports in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant;of type, grade, class,and9 ARI-11622 �� E. Evaluation reports. approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations. use classifications required to seal joints in metal panels and remain weathertight; and as 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS (FOR OWNER REVIEW) 3.2 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. / F "her" A. Maintenance data. A. Special Inspections: Engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections: 3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311. �, 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1. As stipulated in Ch. 17 of the IBC. 2.4 FABRICATION V/8�t�/ 09/02/2021 A. Installer Qualifications:An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to install 2. According to ICC-ES AC24, ICC-ES AC235. A. General: Fabricate and finish metal panels and accessories at the factory, by manufacturers standard manufacturer's system using trained workers. C. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performance requirements demonstrated B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals,to demonstrate aesthetic D. EIFS Tests and Inspections:According to ASTM E 2359, ICC-ES AC24, ICC-ES AC219. by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional and structural effects, to set quality standards for materials and execution, and to set quality standards for fabrication and E. EIFS will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. requirements. PROJECT INFORMATION: installation. 3.3 PROTECTION B. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full length of panel. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed A. Outsulation LCMD Systems 1-5 shall be protected from inclement weather and other sources of damage C. Fabricate metal panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that provide a Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. until dry and permanent protection in the form of flashings, sealants, etc. are installed. weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise from movements. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING D. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturers T I GA R D O R A. Materials shall be delivered to the job site in the original, unopened packages with labels intact. END OF SECTION 072419 recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"that apply B. Upon arrival, materials shall be inspected for physical damage,freezing or overheating. Questionable to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of dem indicated. materials shall not be used. 1. Forth exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. 1. Materials shall be stored at the job site, and at all times, in a cool, dry location, out of direct sunlight, SECTION 074213-ALUMINUM SIDING PANELS marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. protected from weather and other sources of damage. Minimum storage temperature shall be per PART 1 - GENERAL 2. Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with T I GA R D, OREGON 97223 product data sheets. 1.1 SUMMARY epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. 2. Maximum storage temperate shall not exceed 100°F (38°C). NOTE: Minimize exposure of materials A. Section includes aluminum siding panels. 3. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams. to temperatures over 90°F(32'C). Finishes exposed to temperatures over 110°F (43 °C)for even 1.2 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder. short periods may exhibit skinning, increased viscosity and should be inspected prior to use. A. Maintenance Data: For metal panels to include in maintenance manuals. 4. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion, but movable,joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to C. Protect all products from inclement weather and direct sunlight. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE comply with SMACNA standards. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by 5. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on A. Environmental Requirements manufacturer. faces of accessories exposed to view. B 1.Application of wet materials shall not take place during inclement weather unless appropriate protection B. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and 6. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from is provided. Protect materials from inclement weather until they are completely dry. execution. compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. B 2. At the time of Dryvit product application, the air and wall surface temperatures shall be from 40 °F(4°C) 1. Build mockups for typical exterior wall in sizes approximately 48 inches(1200 mm)] long by 48 inches a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"or aluminum minimum to 100°F (38 °C) maximum for the following products: (1200 mm) high by full thickness, including face and backup assemblies and accessories. siding panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured. a. DPR, PMR, HDP, Weatherlastic and E Finishes, Color Prime, Primus, Genesis and NCB. a. Include fascia or coping at top of mockup. 2.5 FINISHES b. For other products, refer to specific product data sheets. b. Include all colors, finishes, and styles indicated on the drawings. A. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, 3. These temperatures shall be maintained with adequate air ventilation and circulation for a minimum of c. Include a sealant-filled joint at least 16 inches(400 mm)long in mockup. temporary protective covering before shipping. 24 hours (48 hours for Weatherlastic Finishes,Ameristone, and TerraNeo)thereafter, or until the d. Include metal studs, sheathing, veneer anchors,trim, and flashing in formed metal panel B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if products are completely dry. Refer to published product data sheets for more speck information. mockup to match the materials indicated in the drawings. they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are not CLIENT INFORMATION B. Existing Conditions: The contractor shall have access to electric power, clean water and a clean work area 2. Protect accepted mockups from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of at the location where the Dryvit materials are to be applied. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. 1.11 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING contained in mockups. PART 3- EXECUTION A. Installation shall be coordinated with other construction trades. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 3.1 EXAMINATION O B. Sufficient manpower and equipment shall be employed to ensure a continuous operation, free of cold A. Deliver components, metal panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joints, scaffold lines, texture variation, etc. Package metal panels for protection during transportation and handling. installation tolerances, metal panel supports, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1.12 WARRANTY B. Unload, store, and erect metal panels in a manner to prevent bending,warping,twisting, and surface 1. Examine framing to verity that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support A. Dryvit Systems, Inc. shall provide a written limited materials warranty against defective damage. members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metal panel Material C. Stack metal panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight and ventilated manufacturer. B. The applicator shall warrant workmanship separately. covering. Store metal panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for drainage of water. Do not store 2. Examine sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that AMERICAN FAMILY PART 2- PRODUCTS metal panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal panel manufacturer. 2.1 MANUFACTURERS D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal panels during installation. a. Verify that air-or water-resistive barriers been installed over sheathing or backing substrate A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dryvit Outsulation LCMD 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS to prevent air infiltration or water penetration. CARE Systems 1-5 or comparable product. A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of B. Substitutions requests during bidding, are allowed. permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers'written instructions and penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels before installation. C. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS from single source from single EIFS manufacturer and from sources warranty requirements. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3700 CA HA BA BEACH RD approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with EIFS components. 1.6 COORDINATION 3.2 PREPARATION 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of walls, and other A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and BIRMINGHAM, A L A. EIFS Performance: Comply with ASTM E 2568 and with the following: adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. Coordinate installation with anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 1. Weathertightness: Resistant to uncontrolled water penetration from exterior,with a means to drain adjacent materials. 1. Framing: clip furring channels to supports, as required to comply with requirements for assemblies 35242 water entering EIFS to the exterior. 1.7 WARRANTY indicated. 2. Impact Performance: ASTM E 2568, Standard resistance A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace 2. Do not begin installation until colors have been verified. 3. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between EIFS and substrates, components of metal panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 3. Verify framing members are ready to receive panel system. Correct any framing that is not proper, CLIENT PROJECT NO. resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads,weather, or other in-service conditions. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: aligned and correctly installed. 2.3 EIFS MATERIALS a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing. 4. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result A. Primer/Sealer: EIFS manufacturers standard substrate conditioner designed to protect substrates from b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering. for the material under the project conditions. moisture penetration and to improve the bond between substrate and insulation adhesive. 2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 3.3 METAL PANEL INSTALLATION B. Water-Resistive Coatings: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation and accessories for use as water- B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to A. General: Install metal panels according to manufacturers written instructions in orientation, sizes, and resistive barriers; compatible with substrate and complying with physical and performance criteria of repair finish or replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within locations indicated. Install panels perpendicular to supports unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal ASTM E 2570. specified warranty period. panels and other components of the Work securely in place,with provisions for thermal and structural C. Air/Water-Resistive Barrier Components: Sheet Type Membranes; Code approved water-resistive barrier 1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: movement. such as but not limited to Dupont Tyvek StuccoWrap, Tyvek Home Wrap or Commercial Wrap, #15 Felt, a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. 1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal panels. Grade D Paper b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. 2. Flash and seal metal panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws. Do not D. Flexible-Membrane Flashing used to protect substrate edges and terminations: Liquid-applied an c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal. begin installation until air-or water-resistive barriers and flashings that will be concealed by metal extremely flexible, self-adhering, self-healing, rubberized-asphalt and polyethylene-film composite sheet or 2. Finish Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion. panels are installed. tape and primer; EIFS manufacturer's standard or product recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer. PART 2- PRODUCTS 3. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes. E. Insulation Adhesive: EIFS manufacturers standard formulation designed for indicated use; compatible with 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS 4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. substrate. A. Structural Performance: Provide metal panel systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following 5. Install flashing and trim as metal panel work proceeds. F. Insulation Board: Expanded Polystyrene(EPS) meeting Dryvit specification for Insulation Board, DS131, loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 6. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end and the following requirements: 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL 1. The insulation board shall be manufactured by a board supplier listed by Dryvit Systems 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings T Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe-and conduit-penetrating panels. NO. DATE SUBJECT A G. Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave, glass-fiber mesh treated for compatibility with 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/180 of the span. B. Fasteners: other EIFS materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained mesh tensile strength of not B. Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft.when tested according to ASTM E 283 at the 1. Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior; A REVISION OR ISSUE less than 120 Ibf/in. (21 dN/cm)according to ASTM E 2098. following test-pressure difference: use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior. SSOE Architects, L.L.C. H. Drainage Medium: Drainage Mat(System 1);a blue 1/8"thick mat composed of open weave polymer 1. Test-Pressure Difference: 1.57 Ibf/sq. ft. C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against 1001 Madison Avenue threads C. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 at galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer. Toledo OH 43604 I. Base-Coat Materials: Shall be compatible with the EPS insulation board and reinforcing mesh. the following test-pressure difference: D. Lap-Seam Metal Panels: Fasten metal panels to supports with fasteners at each lapped joint at location T. (419)255-3830 J. Waterproof Adhesive/Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturers standard waterproof formulation. 1. Test-Pressure Difference: 2.86 Ibf/sq. ft.. and spacing recommended by manufacturer. z K. Primer: EIFS manufacturers standard factory-mixed, elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing base-coat 2. Provide positive drainage to exterior for moisture entering or condensation occurring within panel 1. Apply panels and associated items true to line for neat and weathertight enclosure. 021 -01005-00 PROJECT NO: a_ surface for application of finish coat. system. 2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal a L. Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturers Standard DPR(Dirt Pickup Resistance): Water-based, acrylic D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by panels. PROJECT MANAGER: M.ALFIERI a finish with integral color and texture and formulated with DPR chemistry preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of 3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use proper tools to DESIGNED: T. McMAHON 1. Colors&Textures: Refer to Drawings connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seat without rupture of washer. o M. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with EIFS due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress washer tightly CHECKED: L. SCHIATTER o manufacturers written instructions; manufactured from UV-stabilized PVC; and complying with 1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. ASTM D 1784, manufacturers standard cell class for use intended, and ASTM C 1063. 2. Accommodate movement within system without damage to components or movement within system; E. Watertight Installation: DRAWING TITLE: o movement between system and perimeter components when subject to seasonal temperature 1. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant or tape to seal lapped joints of metal panels, using sealant or SPECIFICATIONS a cycling; dynamic loading and release of loads;deflection of structural support framing. tape as recommend by manufacturer on side laps of nesting-type panels and elsewhere as needed to a n make panels watertight. vii' 2. Provide sealant or tape between panels and protruding equipment, vents, and accessories. m 3. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (152-mm) end lap, sealed with sealant and 2'^ fastened together by interlocking clamping plates. v c LL N DRAWING NO Q c� A9. 8 °W � Q m0 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 GENERAL NOTES 00 SSOeo A. REFERENCE DRAWING EO.1 FOR SYMBOL LEGEND& 7 GENERAL NOTES. B. COORDINATE ALL TV MOUNTING HEIGHTS WITH 0 /G EXAM ARCHITECT PRIOR TO INSTALLATION, CONSULTANTS: 6 EXAM 5 EXAM 4 1 EXAM 3 F C. COORDINATE WITH ARCH ITECTECTURAL ELEVATIONS 112 113 114 AND AND FURNITURE LOCATIONS/FURNITURE MANUFACTURER'S REQUIREMENTS FOR RECEPTACLE MOUNTING HEIGHTS AND LOCATIONS if AS REQUIRED. \ ( % 7 D. ALL RECEPTACLES, INCLUDING PATIENT CARE AREAS SUCH AS, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, TREATMENT, INDIVIDUAL CARE,AND EXAM ROOMS, SHALL HAVE REDUNDANT GROUND PER NEC 517.13. C CORRIDOR E. PROVIDE A METAL RACEWAY SYSTEM, METALLIC C CABLE ARMOR, OR SHEATH ASSEMBLY THAT I QUALIFIES AS AN EQUIPMENT GROUND CONDUCTOR IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 250.118 OF THE NEC IN PATIENT CARE AREAS AS REQUIRED BY SECTION 517.13 OF THE NEC. AN INSULATED EQUIPMENT — --- GROUND CONDUCTOR SHALL BE PROVIDED IN uu------ ADDITION AS INDICATED IN SECTION 517.13 OF THE NEC. THIS INCLUDES ALL LIGHTING IN PATIENT CARE PATIENT AREAS. NON HCF RATED MC CABLE IS ALLOWED FOR A] [-�jl THOSE AREAS NOT IDENTIFIED BY THE ARCHITECT AS TOILET PATIENT CARE AREAS. 110 SEAL ON THIS DOCUMENT AUTHORIZED BY: F. ALL BENDS IN GROUNDING CONDUCTORS SHALL NURSE HAVE A MINIMUM 12"RADIUS. STATION G. GROUNDING CONNECTIONS SHALL BE MADE AS PRVEDURE FOLLOWS TO FORM A CONTINUOUS GROUNDING LOUISE M. -----------_------------- I= 0 10 .................... SYSTEM: 8; t6 A. CADWELD OR THERMOWELD ALL CABLE TO CABLE. r`4 SCHLA=R 0 B. CADWELD OR THERMOWELD CABLE TO GROUND ------------ ROD. TOLEDO, OH C. CADWELD OR THERMOWELD TO EXISTING GROUND. ARI-11622 LAB/ Fr CORRIDOR 2 1 L CONDUCTORS TO MINIMIZE PHYSICAL DAMAGE. ——-------------- 9 0 X-RAY 9/02/2021 VIEWING .............. ------- ----—-_-_- I. CONNECTIONS TO BUILDING STEEL COLUMNS SHALL H. LOCATE AND IDENTIFY ALL EXPOSED GROUNDING UTILITY AREA -___--_----------- BE MADE TO THE WEB PORTION OF THE COLUMN AT 108 F T T_ 18"ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR. PROJECT INFORMATION: -e J. GROUNDING SYSTEM RESISTANCE SHALL MEASURE AT 3 OHMS OR LESS AT ANY POINT OF THE LOOP. 6" CORRIDOR INDIVIDUAL GROUND RODS OR GROUND ROD TIGARD, CLUSTERS SHALL NOT MEASURE IN EXCESS OF 25 OR PHYSICIANS ................ OHMS OF GROUND RESISTANCE. QFFj _QE 11675 SW PACIFIC HWY. 3 BREAK ROOM :rlF K. PROVIDE TAMPER PROOF RECEPTACLES AS TIGARD, OREGON 97223 104CREQUIRED BY THE AHJ.ALL RECEPTACLES SHALL BE ----------— t -1 EXAM 1 M2 X-RAY HEALTHCARE RATED. EXAM 105 __T qpw 49 L. ALL MATERIAL LOCATED IN MECHANICAL PLENUMS SHALL BE RATED FOR SUCH INSTALLATIONS. 6" B web PLAN NOTES ........... - --------- B 1. SAWCUT FLOOR AND INSTALL(1) V CONDUIT FOR POWER AND (2) 1" CONDUITS FOR DATA. COORDINATE PATCHWORK WITH GENERAL CONTRACTOR AND ANY BELOW GRADE UTILITIES PRIOR TO CUTTING FLOOR. CLIENT INFORMATION 2. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF CEILING ADMIN MOUNTED PROCEDURE EQUIPMENT DEVICE WITH 104A / TRIAGE 1 EQUIPMENT INSTALLER PRIOR TO INSTALLATION. 103A PRINTER MANAGER CHECK-OUT 3. LOCATION FOR NEW DATA TERMINATION. BOND NEW 104B GROUND BAR WITH 1#6G.TO THE GROUND BUS IN PANEL MPA. MAINTAIN CLEARANCE AROUND EQUIPMENT. P F-0 -1 TESTING 117 r 4� REFERENCE ELECTRICAL SYMBOL LEGEND, SHEET E0.1, FOR DESCRIPTION OF SURFACE MOUNTED AMERICAN FAMILY MULTI-OUTLET RACEWAY. LOBBY CARE Ll 5. PROVIDE 120V POWER FOR REMOTE FLUSH VALVE. 2 VERIFY EXACT REQUIREMENTS WITH PLUMBING I Lp101A i 3700 CAHABA BEACH RD CONTRACTOR. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL FINAL CONNECTIONS. TOILET 1 BIRMINGHAM, AL F�`J� 102 6. PROVIDE 120V POWER FOR DOOR SECURITY FROM 35242 THE NEAREST 120V GENERAL USE RECEPTACLE VESTIBULE CIRCUIT. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE ALL CLIENT PROJECT NO: FINAL CONNECTIONS. 7. APPROXIMATE LOCATION FOR (2) INCOMING 2" COMMUNICATION CONDUITS. EXTEND CONDUITS WITH PULL STRING TO NEW DATA LOCATION. L= REFERENCE PLAN NOTE#3 THIS SHEET FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION. ----------- 09-03-21 PLAN REVIEW CITY SUBMITTAL NO., DATE I SUBJECT A A REVISION OR ISSUE SSOE Architects, L.L.C. 1001 Madison Avenue Toled OH 43604 T. (4104)255-3830 PROJECT NO- 021 -01005-00 a- TV 76 w PROJECT MANAGER: M. ALFIERI < ut , Lill U DESIGNED: D. STEVENS CHECKED Checker DRAWING TITLE: FLOOR PLAN - POWER & 0< 0 I TECHNOLOGY to i NI U MANAGER to o Al FLOOR PLAN — POWER & TECHNOLOGY wN > E3.1DRAWING N R li SCALE: 114"= l'-O" 0: KeTel'elft;ld < izl Lu E3. � 0) Not part of this permit 1 2 3 4